RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page1
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (1,1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page3
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (3,1)
AWord to Mazda Owners
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. In the event of a crash, this device records data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur and lead to the designing of safer
vehicles.
Air Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to
damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ...] may
contain Perchlorate Material– Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2009 Mazda Motor Corporation
Printed in Japan May 2009(Print1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page4
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (4,1)
How to Use This Manual
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and sometimes
suggests how to make better use of your
vehicle.
The symbol below, located on some parts
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
Illustrations complement the words of the
manual to best explain how to enjoy your
Mazda. By reading your manual, you can
find out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
The symbol below in this manual means
“Do not do this” or “Do not let this
happen”.
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information
in your manual.
You'll find several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to
your vehicle, or both, could result if
the caution is ignored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page5
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (5,1)
Table of Contents
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint
systems and SRS air bags.
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment
of various parts.
Important information about driving your Mazda.
Explanation of instruments and controls.
Use of various features for drive comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
Technical information about your Mazda.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page6
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (6,1)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page8
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (8,1)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Dashboard and Interior Overview
The equipment and installation position varies by model.
*Refer to Navigation System at the separate manual (if equipped).
1-2
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page9
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (9,1)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Dashboard and Interior Overview
MT shift lever .................................................................................................... page 5-10
AT shift lever (Sport AT) ................................................................................... page 5-13
Vanity mirror ...................................................................................................... page 6-77
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page10
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (10,1)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
The equipment and installation position varies by model.
1-4
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page11
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (11,1)
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Exterior Overview
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page12
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (12,1)
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page13
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (13,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
2
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, child-restraint
systems and SRS air bags.
Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2
íSome models.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page14
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (14,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Make sure the adjustable components
of a seat are locked in place:
Front Seats (Manually
Operated Seats)
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that
are not securely locked are
dangerous. In a sudden stop or
collision, the seat or seatback could
move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat
are locked in place by attempting to
slide the seat forward and backward
and rocking the seatback.
WARNING
Do not modify or replace the front
seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats
such as replacing the upholstery or
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The
front seats contain air bag
components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such
modifications could damage the
supplemental restraint system and
result in serious injury. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is
any need to remove or reinstall the
front seats.
qSeat Slide
WARNING
Adjust the driver's seat only when the
vehicle is stopped:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous. The
driver could lose control of the vehicle
and have an accident.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is
dangerous. A collision, even one not
strong enough to inflate the air bags,
could damage the front seats which
contain essential air bag
To move a seat forward or backward, raise
the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position and release the lever.
(Standard)
components. If there was a
subsequent collision, an air bag may
not deploy which could lead to
injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,
front seat belt pretensioners and air
bags after a collision.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page15
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (15,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
(Recaro manufactured bucket seats)í
Always sit in the front passenger seat
properly with the seatback upright and
feet on the floor:
Your front passenger seat has weight
sensors, sitting in the front passenger
seat improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous as it can take off weight
from the seat bottom and affect the
weight determination of the front
passenger sensing system. As a result
the front passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which
could result in serious injury. Always
sit upright against the seatback with
your feet on the floor.
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and
backward.
qSeat Recline
Do not drive with the seatback
unlocked:
WARNING
All of the seatbacks play an
important role in your protection in a
vehicle. Leaving the seatback
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow
passengers to be ejected or thrown
around and baggage to strike
occupants in a sudden stop or
collision, resulting in severe injury.
After adjusting the seatback at any
time, even when there are no other
passengers, rock the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
Do not drive with either front seat
reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you do not get the full
protection from seat belts. During
sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and
suffer serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.
íSome models.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page16
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (16,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
(Dial type)
CAUTION
To change the seatback angle, lean
forward slightly while rotating the dial to
the desired position.
When returning a rear-reclined
seatback to its upright position,
make sure you hold onto the
seatback with your other hand while
operating the lever or dial. If the
seatback is not supported, it will flip
forward suddenly and could cause
injury.
q
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)í
To adjust the seat height, move the lever
up or down.
Up
(Lever type)
To change the seatback angle, lean
forward slightly while raising the lever.
Then lean back to the desired position and
release the lever.
Down
Make sure the lever returns to its original
position and the seatback is locked in
place by attempting to push it forward and
backward.
2-4
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page17
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (17,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
qFolding the Seat (Passenger's seat
CAUTION
only)
Ø When operating the seatback,
support the seatback firmly with
one hand while it folds down.
When lowering the seatback, be
careful not to pinch or injure your
hand or fingers.
WARNING
Do not drive with the seatback
unlocked:
All of the seatbacks play an
important role in your protection in a
vehicle. Leaving the seatback
unlocked is dangerous as it can allow
passengers to be ejected or thrown
around and baggage to strike
occupants in a sudden stop or
collision, resulting in severe injury.
After adjusting the seatback at any
time, even when there are no other
passengers, rock the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
Ø Do not step on the lever as it could
damage it.
Because your vehicle has free-style doors
opened while the front door is closed. To
exit the rear seating area, fold the front
seatback forward using the following
procedure and open the front door first.
NOTE
The seatback folding feature is not equipped
on the manually operated driver's seat. The
feature is only available on the power seat.
Never lower a front seatback while an
occupant is seated in the seat, even if
the vehicle is stopped:
Lowering a front seatback while an
occupant is seated in the seat is
dangerous because the seatback
folds down suddenly when operated
which could cause an injury.
Seatback folding
(Standard)
Pull the lever upward to fold the seatback
forward.
Never lower a front seatback while the
vehicle is moving:
Lowering a front seatback while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because the seatback folds down
suddenly when operated which could
result in an accident or injury.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page18
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (18,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
(Recaro manufactured bucket seats)í
Driver's Seat (Electrically
Operated Seat)
Pull the lever upward to fold the seatback
forward.
The power operated seat is available only
on the driver's seat. The front passenger
seat is manually operated.
Refer to Front Seats (Manually Operated
instructions.
WARNING
Do not modify or replace the front
seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats
such as replacing the upholstery or
loosening any bolts is dangerous. The
front seats contain air bag
To return the seatback to its on-road
position
components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such
modifications could damage the
supplemental restraint system and
result in serious injury. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if there is
any need to remove or reinstall the
front seats.
To return the seatback to its on-road
position, press the seatback rearward until
is locks in place.
After returning the seatback to its on-road
position, make sure it is secured by
attempting to lightly move it forward and
back.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is
dangerous. A collision, even one not
strong enough to inflate the air bags,
could damage the front seats which
contain essential air bag
components. If there was a
subsequent collision, an air bag may
not deploy which could lead to
injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats,
front seat belt pretensioners and air
bags after a collision.
2-6
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page19
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (19,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
CAUTION
Ø The seat-bottom power
The seat can be slid rearward by continuously
pressing the switch. In addition, the seatback
also lowers rearward.
adjustment is operated by motors.
Refer to Folding the Seat on page 2-10.
Avoid extended operation because
excessive use can damage the
motors.
Ø To prevent the battery from
running down, avoid using the
power adjustment when the
engine is stopped. The adjuster
uses a large amount of electrical
power.
Ø Do not use the switch to make
more than one adjustment at a
time.
qSeat Slide
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter
switch on the outside of the seat to the
front or back and hold it. Release the
switch at the desired position.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page20
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (20,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
To change the seatback angle, press the
front or rear side of the reclining switch.
Release the switch at the desired position.
qSeat Recline
WARNING
Do not drive with either front seat
reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the
vehicle is moving is dangerous
because you do not get the full
protection from seat belts. During
sudden braking or a collision, you
can slide under the lap belt and
suffer serious internal injuries. For
maximum protection, sit well back
and upright.
Always sit in the front passenger seat
properly with the seatback upright and
feet on the floor:
qHeight Adjustment
To adjust the seat height, move the switch
up or down.
Your front passenger seat has weight
sensors, sitting in the front passenger
seat improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far
while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous as it can take off weight
from the seat bottom and affect the
weight determination of the front
passenger sensing system. As a result
the front passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air
bag and seat belt pretensioner, which
could result in serious injury. Always
sit upright against the seatback with
your feet on the floor.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page21
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (21,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Programmed seat positions can be
activated using the following function:
· Programming buttons 1, 2, or 3.
Operation using the seat-side buttons
Programming
Park the vehicle in a safe location before
performing the seat position
programming. (Vehicle must be stopped)
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
For each seat position adjustment
method refer to the following pages:
Seat Slide (page 2-7)
qSeat Position Memory
Seat Recline (page 2-8)
Height Adjustment (page 2-8)
One-touch seat position programming and
a activation function are available on the
driver's seat.
2. Press the desired programming button
1, 2, or 3 while pressing the set button
until a beep sound is heard.
CAUTION
The button is programmed after a beep
sound is heard. Other buttons can be
programmed using the same procedure.
When activating the seat position, do
not place your hands or fingers
around the seat bottom. The seat
moves to the desired position
automatically, and if your hands or
fingers are placed around the seat
bottom, it could cause injury.
NOTE
Vehicle maintenance or other reasons
requiring the vehicle battery to be
disconnected will result in the seat position
memory being erased.
In this case, re-program the seat positions.
Set button
Seat position activation
While the vehicle is parked safely, press
and hold a programming button 1, 2, or 3
for the desired seat position.
When the seat is in the programmed
position, a beep sound is heard.
Programming of the driver's seat positions
is possible using the following function:
· Programming buttons 1, 2, or 3 and the
set button.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page22
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (22,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
Because your vehicle has free-style doors
opened while the front door is closed. To
exit the rear seating area, fold the front
seatback forward using the following
procedure and open the front door first.
If any of the following occurs, the seat position
activation function cancels:
l
A seat adjustment switch other than a
lumbar support switch is operated.
l
The vehicle moves or starts to move.
l
The selected programming button 1, 2, or 3
Seatback folding
or the set button is pressed again.
l
Press and hold the upper part of the
switch while the vehicle is parked safely
to slide the seat forward and fold the
seatback forward.
The set button is operated.
qLumbar Support Adjustment
The amount of lumbar support can be
adjusted by pressing the switch.
To increase the seat firmness, press and
hold the front part of the switch to the
desired position, then release it.
Press the rear part of the switch to
decrease firmness.
To return the seatback to its on-road
position
Press and hold the lower part of the switch
while the vehicle is parked safely to slide
the seat rearward and raise the seatback.
qFolding the Seat
WARNING
Never lower a front seatback while an
occupant is seated in the seat, even if
the vehicle is parked safely:
Lowering a front seatback while an
occupant is seated in the seat is
dangerous because the seatback
folds down suddenly when operated
which could cause an injury.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page23
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (23,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
Rear Seat
The operation cancels in the following cases:
l
A seat adjustment switch other than a
lumbar support switch is operated.
l
The set button is operated.
l
Any programming button
pressed.
―
is
l
The vehicle moves or starts to move.
The seat stops moving when it returns to
its on-road position. A beep sound is
heard at this time.
NOTE
l
Pressing and holding the lower part of the
switch again after the seat has returned to
its on-road position will move the seat
farther rearward.
WARNING
Make sure luggage and cargo is
secured before driving:
l
Vehicle maintenance or other reasons
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
requiring the vehicle battery to be
disconnected will result in the seat position
memory being erased. As a result, the seat
will continue to slide rearward and the
seatback will lower rearward. Operate a
switch other than a lumbar support
adjustment switch to adjust the seat
position.
Do not allow anyone to sit on the
center console between the rear seats:
Allowing someone to sit on the rear
center console between the rear seats
is dangerous. The rear center console
is not designed for occupant seating.
During a collision, occupants not
wearing a seat belt could be thrown
from the vehicle and seriously injured
or even killed.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page24
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (24,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Warmerí
WARNING
Ø Be careful when using the seat
warmer. The heat from the seat
warmer may be too hot for some
people, as indicated below, and
could cause a low-temperature
burn.
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
Press the switch to turn the seat warmer
on or off. When the switch is in the ON
position, the indicator light will come on.
Ø
Infants, small babies, elderly
people, and physically
challenged people
People with delicate skin
People who are excessively
fatigued
People who are drunk
People who have taken sleep-
inducing medicine such as
sleeping pills or cold medicine
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø Do not use the seat warmer with
anything having high moisture-
retention ability such as a blanket
or cushion on the seat. The seat
may be heated excessively and
cause a low-temperature burn.
Ø Do not use the seat warmer even
when taking a short nap in the
vehicle. The seat may be heated
excessively and cause a low-
temperature burn.
Ø Do not place heavy objects with
sharp projections on the seat, or
insert needles or pins into it. This
could cause the seat to become
excessively heated and result in
injury from a minor burn.
CAUTION
Do not use organic solvents to clean
the seat. It may damage the seat
surface and the heater.
2-12
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page25
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (25,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
NOTE
Use the seat warmer when the engine is
running, and do not continue to use it for a
long period of time.
The temperature of the seat warmer cannot be
adjusted beyond High and Low because the
seat warmer is controlled by a thermostat.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page26
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (26,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way
when not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two
modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking mode.
While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown
out of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same
collision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not
available to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,
which could cause serious injury or death.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt
webbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate
protection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt
systems in use during an accident before they are used again.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page27
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (27,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has
been expended:
One or both front air bags may deploy, and the corresponding pretensioner(s) may
also deploy at the same time. Like the air bags, the front seat belt pretensioners will
only function once. While it is safer to use a post-crash (a seat belt that was used in
an accident) than no front seat belt at all, using a front seat belt with an expended
pretensioner or load limiter loaded reduces the safety available to you. If the front
seat belt pretensioners are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will increase.
Expended front seat belt pretensioners and air bags must be replaced after any
collision which caused them to deploy. Additionally, the load limiter will only limit
loads on the chest once in a collision and this is another reason to have the front
seat belts inspected. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the front seat
belt pretensioners and air bags after any collision.
Make sure the seat belt is not caught or pinched in the door:
Wearing a seat belt that is caught or pinched in the door is dangerous. The seat belt
could become loose and not provide adequate protection in a sudden stop or
collision.
Make sure nothing is placed on the seat belt slide bar:
Placing your foot or other objects such as an umbrella on the seat belt slide bar is
dangerous. The front seat belt is built into the rear door, and the lower part of the
seat belt slides forward or backward along the seat belt slide bar as the rear door
opens or closes. If the seat belt slider is blocked, the seat belt could be improperly
positioned and would provide little or no protection in a collision.
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep
them clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to “Cleaning the
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page28
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (28,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your
doctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.
qEmergency Locking Mode
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision. When the seat belt is fastened, it will
always be in the emergency locking mode until it is switched to automatic locking mode by
pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt feels tight and hinders comfortable
movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it may be in the automatic locking
mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return the belt to the more
comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped in a safe, level
area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and then extend it
around you again.
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it
out slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again
slowly.
qAutomatic Locking Mode
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will
retract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child
restraint (page 2-25).
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page29
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (29,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Location of Seat Belt
For rear seat
For front seat
WARNING
Do not use a front seat belt while seated in a rear seat:
Using a front seat belt, which is stored in the rear door, is dangerous as the seat belt
cannot function at its full capacity during sudden braking or in a collision, which
could result in serious, injury or death. In addition, using the seat belt in this manner
could damage the rear seat belt buckle.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page30
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (30,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt
WARNING
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the
Seat Belt:
qFastening the Seat Belt
Improper positioning of the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is dangerous.
Always make sure the shoulder
portion of the seat belt is positioned
across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on
your neck, or on your upper arm.
1. Grasp the seat belt tongue.
2. Slowly pull out the lap/shoulder belt.
Lap/shoulder belt
Seat belt tongue
4. Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust
the shoulder belt so that it fits snugly
against your body.
3. Insert the seat belt tongue into the seat
belt buckle until you hear a click
sound.
Take up slack
Keep low on
hip bone
Too high
Seat belt tongue
WARNING
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat
Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn
too high is dangerous. In a collision,
this would concentrate the impact
force directly on the abdominal area,
causing serious injury. Wear the lap
portion of the belt snugly and as low
as possible.
Seat belt buckle
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page31
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (31,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
qUnfastening the Seat Belt
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
and Load Limiting Systems
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out
and check for kinks or twists. Then make
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
For optimum protection, the driver and
front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioner and load limiting
systems. For both these systems to work
properly you must wear the seat belt
properly.
Pretensioners:
In moderate or severe frontal or near-
frontal accidents, the front air bag and
pretensioner systems deploy
simultaneously. The front seat belt
retractors remove slack quickly as the air
bags are expanding.
Button
In addition, the pretensioner system for
the front passenger, like the front
passenger air bag, is designed to only
deploy in accordance with the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat. Any
time the air bags and front seat belt
pretensioners have fired they must be
replaced. For details, refer to the front
passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-44).
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect it for
kinks and twists. If it is still not retracting
properly, have it inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and can
activate in any accident mode with
sufficient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fired,
the load limiting function must be
checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer
after any collision.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page32
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (32,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended
in this owner's manual:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices is
dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable
which would prevent it from
activating in an accident. The
occupants or repairers could be
seriously injured.
Incorrect positioning of the driver and
front passenger seat belts is
dangerous. Without proper
positioning, the pretensioner and
load limiting systems cannot provide
adequate protection in an accident
and this could result in serious injury.
For more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to “Fastening the seat
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with non-
deactivated pretensioners is
One or both front air bags may
deploy, and the corresponding
pretensioner(s) may also deploy at
the same time. Like the air bags, the
front seat belt pretensioners will only
function once. While it is safer to use
a post-crash (a seat belt that was
used in an accident) than no front
seat belt at all, using a front seat belt
with an expended pretensioner or
load limiter loaded reduces the safety
available to you. If the front seat belt
pretensioners are not replaced, the
risk of injury in a collision will
increase. Expended front seat belt
pretensioners and air bags must be
replaced after any collision which
caused them to deploy. Additionally,
the load limiter will only limit loads
on the chest once in a collision and
this is another reason to have the
front seat belts inspected. Always
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
inspect the front seat belt
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury could
result. Ask an Authorized Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of the
pretensioner system or how to scrap
a pretensioner-equipped vehicle.
NOTE
l
The pretensioner system will activate in a
moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal
collision. The pretensioner system for the
front passenger is designed to only deploy
in accordance with the total seated weight
on the front passenger seat. It will not
activate in most rollovers, side or rear
impacts.
l
Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will be
released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not indicate
a fire. This gas normally has no effect on
occupants, however, those with sensitive
skin may experience light skin irritation. If
residue from the deployment of the air bags
or the front pretensioner system gets on the
skin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
pretensioners and air bags after any
collision.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page33
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (33,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Light
Seat Belt Extender
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page34
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (34,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
NOTE
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless
it is necessary:
When not in use, remove the seat belt extender
and store it in the vehicle. If the seat belt
extender is left connected, the seat belt
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fit properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use
the extender when it is required to
fasten the seat belt properly.
extender might get damaged as it will not
retract with the rest of the seat belt and can
easily fall out of the door when not in use and
be damaged. In addition, the seat belt warning
light will not illuminate and function properly.
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a different vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and the user could be seriously
injured in an accident. Only use the
extender provided for you and for the
particular vehicle and seat. NEVER
use the extender in a different vehicle
or seat. If you sell your Mazda, do
not leave your seat belt extender in
the vehicle. It could be used
accidentally by the new owner of the
vehicle. After removing the seat belt
extender, discard it. Never use the
seat belt extender in any other
vehicle you may own in the future.
Do not use an extender that is too
long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fit
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and
the center of the user's body is less
than 15 cm (6 in).
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page35
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (35,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Driver seated/Front passenger not
seated
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep
The belt minder is a supplemental
warning to the seat belt warning function.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the warning light/beep
operates to give you further reminders
according to the chart below.
The seat belt warning light illuminates
and a beep sound will be heard if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
Conditions of operation
Indicator
Beep
Condition
Result
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
position.
for about 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened while the warning
light and the beep sound are
activated.
The warning light
turns off and the beep
sound stops.
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
The driver's seat belt is
The warning light will
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be
position.
heard.
qBelt Minder
NOTE
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or
restore the seat belt minder.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page36
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (36,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Driver seated/Front passenger seated
The seat belt warning function reminds
the front passenger to fasten the seat belt
according to the chart below.
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Seat belt
(Driver)
Seat belt
(Passenger)
Indicator
Beep
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
Placing heavy items on the front
passenger seat may cause the front
passenger seat belt warning function to
operate depending on the weight of the
item.
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
NOTE
l
To allow the front passenger seat weight
sensor to function properly, do not place
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the
front passenger seat. The sensor may not
function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor
interference.
l
When a small child sits on the front
passenger seat, it is possible that neither
the warning light nor the warning beep
operate.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page37
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (37,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Child Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer to
the center of the vehicle.
Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other
child-restraint systems.
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
front passenger seat weight sensors work as a part of the supplemental restraint system.
This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front
passenger seat belt pretensioner system when the total seated weight on the front passenger
seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66 lb).
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear
seats which are the best place for children.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page38
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (38,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be
properly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and
size. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-
restraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the
vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors
for LATCH child-restraint systems and the corresponding tether anchor.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a
sudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag
forces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be
slammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page39
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (39,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless
it is unavoidable:
In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to
the child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger
seat is unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous:
Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors. Even with the
front passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat to seat
a child, using a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under
the following conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag
deploying and could result in serious injury or death to the child.
Ø The total seated weight of the child with the child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat is approximately 30 kg (66 lb) or more with a child in the child-
restraint system.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger
seatback.
Ø A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Ø Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver
seat.
Ø Any accessories, which might increase the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat, are attached to the front passenger seat.
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page40
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (40,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle
with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of
the front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along
both sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint
system is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could cause
serious injury or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or
against the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the
advantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additional
side air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better location
for children. Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the side
window, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt
used in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers
could be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for
more than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant
properly restrained.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during
warm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your
child touches them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCH
child-restraint systems in the rear seat. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system,
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page41
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (41,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
qRear Seat Child-Restraint System
Installing Child-Restraint
Systems
Installation
Follow these instructions when using a
child-restraint system, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped child-
restraint system to the rear LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “LATCH Child-
Accident statistics reveal that a child is
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's
seat is clearly the worst choice for any
child under 12, and with rear-facing child-
restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to
air bags.
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
Some child-restraint systems now come
with tethers and therefore must be
installed on the seats that take tethers to
be effective. In your Mazda, tethered
child-restraint systems can only be
accommodated in the two positions on the
rear seat.
manufacturer's instructions carefully. If you
are not sure whether you have a LATCH
system or tether, check in the child-restraint
system manufacturer's instructions and follow
them accordingly. Depending on the type of
child-restraint system, it may use LATCH
system instead of seat belts or if the belt goes
across the child's chest, may recommend
against using automatic locking mode.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with
front passenger seat weight sensors (page
2-44), which automatically deactivates the
front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the
safest place for a child of any age or size.
1. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions on
the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to “LATCH Child-Restraint
2. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
WARNING
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:
Installation of a tether equipped
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat defeats the safety
design of the system and will result in
an increased chance of serious injury
if the child-restraint system goes
forward without benefit of being
tethered.
Place tether equipped child-restraint
systems where there are tether
anchors.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page42
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (42,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
3. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in the automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat this step.
Anchor bracket location
Tether strap position
Tether
strap
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be able
to pull the shoulder belt out of the retractor
while the system is in the automatic locking
mode. When you remove the child-restraint
system, be sure the belt fully retracts to return
the system to emergency locking mode before
occupants use the seat belts.
Anchor
bracket
4. If your child-restraint system requires
the use of a tether strap, refer to the
manufacturer's instructions to hook and
tighten the tether strap.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page43
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (43,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
qIf You Must Use the Front Seat
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
for Children
If you cannot put all children in the rear
seat, at least put the smallest children in
the rear and be sure the largest child up
front uses the shoulder belt over the
shoulder.
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat, even
with a seat weight sensor equipped
vehicle.
This seat is also not set up for tethered
child-restraint systems, put them in one of
the rear seat positions set up with tether
anchors.
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint
system cannot be secured in the front
passenger's seat and should be used in the
rear seat.
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the child-
restraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the
side window if you have an optional side
and curtain air bag, it could cause serious
injuries to an out of position occupant. As
children more often sleep in cars, it is
better to put them in the rear seat. If
installing the child-restraint system on the
front seat is unavoidable, follow these
instructions when using a front-facing
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat.
NOTE
l
To check if your front seats have side air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bag
will have a “SRS AIRBAG” tag on the
outboard shoulder of the front seats.
l
To check if your vehicle has curtain air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain air
bag will have an “SRS AIRBAG” marking
on the window pillars along the roof edge.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page44
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (44,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean
over or against the side window of a
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to
lean over or against the side window,
the area of the front passenger seat,
the front and rear window pillars and
the roof edge along both sides from
which the side and curtain air bags
deploy, even if a child-restraint
WARNING
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible if installing a
front-facing child-restraint system on it
is unavoidable:
As your vehicle has front air bags
and doubly so because your vehicle
has side air bags, a front-facing
child-restraint system should be put
on the front passenger seat only
when it is unavoidable.
Even if the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light
illuminates, always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the
force of a deploying air bag could
cause serious injury or death to the
child.
system is used. The impact of
inflation from a side or curtain air
bag could cause serious injury or
death to an out of position child.
Furthermore, leaning over or against
the front door could block the side
and curtain air bags and eliminate
the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and
the additional side air bag that
comes out of the front seat, the rear
seat is always a better location for
children. Take special care not to
allow a child to lean over or against
the side window, even if the child is
seated in a child-restraint system.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat with an air bag
that could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems
on the front seat are particularly
dangerous.
Even in a moderate collision, the
child-restraint system can be hit by a
deploying air bag and moved
violently backward resulting in
serious injury or death to the child.
Even though you may feel assured
that the front passenger air bag will
not deploy based on the fact that the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates.
qFront Passenger's Seat Child-
Restraint System Installation
1. Slide the seat as far back as possible.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page45
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (45,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
2. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions on
the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
5. Make sure the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light illuminates
after installing a child-restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
Refer to Front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light on page
3. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
4. Push the child-restraint system firmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the belt
retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in automatic locking mode. If the belt
does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat the previous step and also this
one.
NOTE
l
Inspect this function before each use of the
child-restraint system. You should not be
able to pull the shoulder belt out of the
retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the belt
fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
l
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts which
are in automatic locking mode.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page46
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (46,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat if
the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminate:
While it is always better to install any
child-restraint system on the rear
seat, it is imperative that a child-
restraint system ONLY be used on the
front passenger seat if the
deactivation indicator light
illuminates when the child is seated
in the child-restraint system (page
2-44). Seating a child in a child-
restraint system installed on the front
passenger seat with the front
passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
dangerous. If this indicator light does
not illuminate even when the total
seated weight is less than
approximately 30 kg (66 lb), this
means that the front passenger front
and side air bags, and seat belt
pretensioner are ready for
deployment. If an accident were to
deploy an air bag, a child in a child-
restraint system sitting in the front
passenger seat could be seriously
injured or killed. If the indicator light
does not illuminate after seating a
child in a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, seat a child
in a child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page47
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (47,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
LATCH Child-Restraint Systems
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seat. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you
must use it to better assure your child's safety.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make
sure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-
restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it
could move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the
seat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in
an improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or
fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH
child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child-
restraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and
the child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could
move in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no
seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow
the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page48
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (48,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
Anchor bracket location
q
LATCH Child-Restraint System
Installation Procedure (Rear Seats)
1. Expand the open seams on the rear of
the seat bottom slightly to verify the
locations of the LATCH lower anchors.
Tether strap position
Tether strap
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower anchors
indicate the locations of LATCH lower
anchors for the attachment of a child-restraint
system.
2. Secure the child-restraint system using
BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the
child-restraint to be sure both anchors
are engaged.
Anchor
bracket
3. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that means it is
very important to properly secure the
tether for child safety. Please carefully
follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions when
installing tethers.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page49
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (49,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
Child Restraint
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or
tether anchor and result in injury.
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the child-
restraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page50
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (50,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include 6 air bags. You can locate
the various air bags by the use of “SRS AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators
are visible in the area where the air bags are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
l
The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)
l
l
l
These systems operate independently depending on the type of accident encountered; The
side and curtain air bags are not likely to deploy on both sides in the same accident because
a vehicle is not often hit from both sides. The side and curtain air bags and the frontal air
bag system will not normally deploy during the same type of accident unless a combination
of frontal and side impacts occur.
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
only in the front seats in certain situations and the rear outside passenger positions only in
same-side collisions, so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
l
Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.
Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
l
inflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal or side collisions that are not severe enough
l
to activate the air bags.
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
l
l
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
l
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-25).
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow the
installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page51
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (51,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.
Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be
expected to inflate only in the first collision with frontal, near frontal or side forces
that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be
hit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. Even if the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as possible. A sleeping child is more likely to lean against
the door and be hit by the side air bag in a moderate, right-side collision. Whenever
possible, always secure a child 12 years and under on the rear seat with an
appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and size.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
The child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently
backward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands
or feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags
inflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too
close. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The
front seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants should
adjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page52
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (52,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them is extremely
dangerous. The side air bags inflate with great force and speed directly out of the
outboard side of the front seat and expand along the front door on the side the car is
hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the door or leaning
against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front seatbacks.
Furthermore, sleeping up against the door or hanging out the windows in the vehicle
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of
supplemental protection. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting
in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air
bags deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere
with air bag inflation and injure the occupants.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching things to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is
dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front
seats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules
in your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof
edge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the
curtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along the
roof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting
the air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open
releasing the gas.
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free
to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the
supplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front
seats.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page53
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (53,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You could
get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,
bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The
air bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflate
unexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.
Front occupants could be seriously injured.
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the
suspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is
dangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make
any modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,
badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra
electrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda
Dealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of front
seats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that the
bags do not accidentally deploy, the driver seat slide position sensor and front
passenger seat weight sensors are not damaged and that the seats retain an
undamaged air bag connection.
NOTE
l
When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.
Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injuries
on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
l
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and that
familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page54
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (54,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System Components
The supplemental restraint systems (SRS) have two basic subsystems:
l
The air bag system with inflators and air bags.
The electrical system with crash sensors and diagnostic module.
l
The air bags are mounted in the following locations:
l
The steering wheel hub
The front passenger dashboard
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides
l
l
l
The air bags are out of sight until activated.
Driver/Front passenger dual stage inflators and air bags
Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Front seat belt pretensioners (page 2-19)
Front air bag sensor
Side crash sensors
Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 2-53)
Side and curtain inflators and air bags
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-44)
Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-44)
Front passenger seat weight sensor control module
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page55
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (55,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-44)
Driver seat slide position sensor
Front seats
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page56
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (56,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
How the Air Bags Work
qHow the Front Air Bags Work
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, an
electrical current is sent to the inflators.
Gases are produced to inflate the front air bags and after the inflation, the front air bags
quickly deflate.
The front air bags will function only once. After that, the front air bags will not work
again and must be replaced.
Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can replace the system components.
The front, dual stage air bags control air bag inflation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity the front air bags deploy with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, they deploy with more energy. Deployment of the front air bags may
differ between the driver and the front passenger depending on the driver seat position,
front passenger weight and front seat belt usage, all of which provide data from each sensor
to the air bag system.
The front air bags will deploy only
in a frontal or frontal offset impact.
Driver seat slide position sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a driver seat slide position sensor as a part of the
supplemental restraint system. The sensor is located under the driver seat. The sensor
determines whether the driver seat is fore or aft of a reference position and sends the seat
position to the diagnostic module (SAS unit). The SAS unit is also designed to control the
deployment of the driver air bag depending on how close the driver seat is to the steering
wheel.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes if the sensor has a
possible malfunction (page 2-53).
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page57
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (57,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front passenger seat weight sensors
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger seat weight sensors as a part of the
front passenger seat rails. These sensors determine the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed to prevent the front passenger front and side air
bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying if the total seated weight is less than
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs).
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat belt
pretensioner system when:
l
There is no passenger in the front passenger seat. (The front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not illuminate.)
The total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than approximately 30 kg (66
l
lbs). (The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.)
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates
according to the following table.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible
malfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
pretensioner system will not deploy.
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side air
bags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page58
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (58,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If the front passenger weight sensors are working properly, the indicator light illuminates
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. After a specified period of time it
goes out.
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:
Front passenger seat
Total seated weight on the Front passenger air bag Front passenger front and
belt pretensioner
front passenger seat
deactivation indicator light
side air bags
Deactivated
Deactivated
system
Empty (Not occupied)*
OFF
ON
Deactivated
Less than approx. 30 kg
(66 lbs)
Deactivated
Ready
Approx. 42 kg (93 lbs) or
more
OFF
Ready
* If the front passenger seat belt is buckled, the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates,
however this does not indicate a malfunction.
The curtain air bag is always ready to inflate and is not deactivated like the front passenger front and side air bags
and seat belt pretensioner systems.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position and does not illuminate as indicated in the
above chart, do not allow a child to sit in the front passenger seat; contact the Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page59
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (59,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
WARNING
Do not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:
When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the total
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of
approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The front
passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition
and the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system
will not deploy during an accident. The front passenger will not have the
supplementary protection of the air bag, which could result in serious injury.
Decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated
weight of approximately 42 kg (93 lbs) could result in an air bag not deploying under
the following conditions, for example:
Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.
Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the
front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat
bottom.
Ø The front passenger seat occupant sits in a manner that does not place the entire
weight of the occupant on the seat such as by sitting too close to the door,
grasping the assist grip or the rim of the moonroof and sitting with the seatback
reclined too far.
Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
Ø Tension in the upward direction is placed on the seat belt slide bar such as by
pulling up on the seat belt.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is close to 30 kg (66
lbs) and they will reactivate before the weight exceeds 42 kg (93 lbs).
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page60
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (60,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the total
seated weight on the front passenger seat from the total seated weight of
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors
will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected
deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat beyond the total seated weight of approximately
30 kg (66 lbs) could result in the front passenger front and side air bags and seat
belt pretensioner system deployment in an accident under the following conditions,
for example:
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
Ø A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with their feet.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Ø Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.
Ø The seat is washed.
Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.
Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver
seat.
Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
Ø Feet or other items are placed on the seat belt slide bar.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the total seated weight on the front passenger seat is less than
approximately 30 kg (66 lbs) and they will reactivate when the weight exceeds
approximately 42 kg (93 lbs).
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page61
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (61,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
CAUTION
Ø To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the
sensors in the front seat bottoms:
Ø
Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on
them.
Ø
Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.
Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
Ø
Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint
system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page
Ø
NOTE
l
The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and
side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or
other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interior
changes suddenly.
l
l
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the total
seated weight on the front passenger seat changes.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after installing a
child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Driver and front passenger buckle switches
The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are
securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page62
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (62,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
qHow the Side and Curtain Air Bags Work
When air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, an
electrical current is sent to the inflators.
Gases are produced to inflate the side and curtain air bags and after the inflation, the side
and curtain air bags quickly deflate. However, the side air bag system for the front
passenger is designed to only deploy in accordance with the total seated weight on the front
passenger seat, however the curtains are not deactivated.
The side and curtain air bags will function only once. After that, the side and curtain air
bags will not work again and must be replaced. Only an Authorized Mazda Dealer can
replace the systems.
The side and curtain air bags will deploy only on the side the
vehicle receives the force of the impact.
qAir Bag Activation/Deactivation
NOTE
If the front passenger seat weight sensors detect a total seated weight on the front passenger seat is
less than approximately 42 kg (93 lb), the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page63
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (63,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
l
Front air bag activation
Driving into a big hole or hitting the far
side of a hole.
The front air bags will inflate if the
severity of impact is above the designed
threshold level.
l
Hitting a solid wall straight on at
greater than about 22 km/h (14 mph).
Limitations to front air bag activation
Depending on the severity of impact, the
front air bags may not inflate in the
following cases:
l
l
Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard
Impacts involving trees or poles cause
object.
severe cosmetic damage but may not
have enough stopping force to activate
the air bag.
l
Landing hard or the vehicle falling.
l
Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
may not provide the stopping force
necessary for air bag deployment.
l
Frontal impact within about a 30
degree range from head-on to the
vehicle.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page64
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (64,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
l
Rear-ending or running under a truck's
Side and curtain air bag activation
tail gate may not provide the stopping
force necessary for air bag deployment.
The severity of impact above the designed
threshold level to one side of the vehicle
(driver or passenger side areas) will cause
the side and curtain air bags on that side
to inflate, but it will not normally deploy
the front air bags.
Non-activation of front air bags
Front air bags will not normally inflate in
the following cases:
l
Collision from the rear.
Limitations to side and curtain air bag
activation
Depending on the severity of impact, the
side and curtain air bags may not inflate in
the following cases:
l
Frontal offset impact may not provide
enough side impact to deploy the side
and curtain air bags.
l
Impact to the side, but it may deploy
the side and curtain air bags.
l
Side impacts involving trees or poles
can cause severe cosmetic damage but
may not have enough impact force to
activate the side and curtain air bags.
l
Vehicle roll-over, may deploy the side
and curtain air bags but not the front air
bags.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page65
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (65,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
l
Vehicle roll-over may not provide
enough side force to deploy the side
and curtain air bags.
qConstant Monitoring
The following components of the air bag
systems are monitored by a diagnostic
system:
l
SAS unit
Front air bag sensor
Air bag modules
Side crash sensors
l
l
l
l
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner
l
Side impacts with two-wheeled
vehicles may not provide enough force
to deploy the side and curtain air bags.
system warning light
Front seat belt pretensioners
Front passenger air bag deactivation
l
l
indicator light
Related wiring
Driver seat slide position sensor
Front passenger seat weight sensors
l
l
l
l
Driver and front passenger seat belt
buckle switches
The diagnostic module continuously
monitors the system's readiness. This
begins when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position and continues while
the vehicle is being driven.
Non-activation of side and curtain air
bag
The side and curtain air bags will not
normally inflate in the following cases:
l
Collision from the rear.
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Light
l
Collision from the front, but it may
deploy the front air bags.
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page66
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (66,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
WARNING
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged
air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
Expended or damaged air bag/seat
belt pretensioner system components
must be replaced after any collision
which caused them to deploy or
damage them. Only a trained
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully
evaluate these systems to see that
they will work in any subsequent
accident. Driving with an expended
or damaged air bag or pretensioner
unit will not afford you the necessary
protection in the event of any
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
subsequent accident which could
result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as
the front seats, front dashboard, the
steering wheel or parts on the front
and rear window pillars and along
the roof edge, containing air bag
parts or sensors is dangerous. These
parts contain essential air bag
components. The air bag could
accidentally activate and cause
serious injuries. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer remove
these parts.
qMaintenance
The air bag systems do not require regular
maintenance. But if any of the following
occurs, take your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible:
l
The air bag system warning light
flashes.
l
The air bag system warning light
remains illuminated.
The air bag system warning light does
l
not illuminate when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position.
The air bags have deployed.
l
l
Dispose of the air bag properly:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a
vehicle with live air bags in it can be
extremely dangerous. Unless all
safety procedures are followed, injury
can result. Ask an Authorized Mazda
Dealer how to safely dispose of an air
bag or how to scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.
Front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position or does not illuminate
as indicated in the chart. For more
details about this indicator light and
this chart, refer to “Front passenger
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page67
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (67,1)
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components
or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modified to accommodate a
person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certified physician, contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page68
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (68,1)
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page69
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (69,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
3
Explanation of basic operations and controls; opening/closing and adjustment
of various parts.
íSome models.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page70
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (70,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Advanced Keysí
The advanced keyless functions (advanced keyless entry and start system) enables the
following operations while the advanced key is being carried (page 3-7).
l
Locking/unlocking the doors, and opening the trunk lid, without operating the key.
Starting the engine without operating the key.
l
Additional functions are available using the buttons on the advanced key.
Refer to Operation Using Advanced Key Functions on page 3-14.
l
The following operations are possible using the transmitter of the keyless entry system
from a distance (Lock/Unlock/Trunk/Panic button):
l
Locking/unlocking the doors.
Opening the trunk lid.
Turning on the alarm.
l
l
l
Locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk lid, or starting the engine using the
auxiliary key.
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with children and keep them in a place where
your children will not find or play with them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the key is dangerous. This could result in someone
being badly injured or even killed. Children may find these new kinds of keys to be
an interesting toy to play with and could cause the power windows or other controls
to operate, or even make the vehicle move.
Radio waves from the advanced key may affect medical equipment such as
pacemakers:
Before using the advanced key near people who use medical equipment, ask the
medical equipment manufacturer or your physician if radio waves from the
advanced key will affect the equipment.
NOTE
l
The driver must carry the advanced key to ensure the system functions properly.
l
l
(With theft-deterrent system)
vehicle and vehicle contents theft.
3-2
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page71
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (71,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Panic button
Lock button
Unlock button
Trunk button
Auxiliary key
Operation indicator light
Key code number plate
A code number is stamped on the plate attached to the key set; detach this plate and store it
in a safe place (not in the vehicle) for use if you need to make a replacement key.
Also write down the code number and keep it in another safe and handy place, but not in
the vehicle.
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer with the code number ready.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page72
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (72,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
CAUTION
Ø Because the advanced key uses low-intensity radio waves, it may not function
correctly under the following conditions:
Ø
The advanced key is carried with communication devices such as cellular
phones.
The advanced key contacts or is covered by a metal object.
The advanced key is near electronic devices such as personal computers or cell
phones.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Non-Mazda genuine electronic equipment is installed in the vehicle.
There is equipment which discharges radio waves near the vehicle.
If the vehicle is near equipment such as wireless pay devices installed at certain
gas stations.
Ø The advanced key may consume battery power excessively if it receives high-
intensity radio waves. Do not place the advanced key near electronic devices such
as televisions or personal computers.
Ø To avoid damage to the advanced key, DO NOT:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the advanced key.
Get the advanced key wet.
Disassemble the advanced key.
Expose the advanced key to high temperatures on places such as the
dashboard or hood, under direct sunlight.
Place heavy objects on the advanced key.
Put the advanced key in an ultrasonic cleaner.
Put any magnetized objects close to the advanced key.
Ø
Ø
Ø
NOTE
l
Battery life is about one year. Be sure to replace the battery as soon as you see the green KEY
indicator light in the instrument cluster begin flashing for 30 seconds after turning off the engine,
otherwise, you will not be able to start the engine using the advanced keyless start system once the
have to either force-start the engine or use the auxiliary key Refer to Advanced Key Battery Dead
Warning on page 3-19.
l
Additional advanced keys can be obtained at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 6 advanced keys
can be used with the advanced keyless functions per vehicle.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page73
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (73,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Replacing the battery at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent
damage to the advanced key. If replacing
the battery by yourself, follow the
instruction below.
qAdvanced Key Maintenance
CAUTION
Ø Make sure the battery is installed
with the correct pole facing
upward. Battery leakage could
occur if it is not installed correctly.
Ø When replacing the battery, be
careful not to bend the electrical
terminals or get oil on them. Also
be careful not to get dirt in the
transmitter as it could be
damaged.
Replacing the advanced key battery
1. Pull out the auxiliary key.
Ø There is the danger of explosion if
the battery is not correctly
replaced.
Ø Replace only with the same type
battery (CR2025 or equivalent).
Ø Dispose of used batteries
according to the following
instructions.
2. Release the cap using a small flathead
screwdriver, then rotate and remove the
cap.
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
Never disassemble.
Never throw the battery into
fire or water.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Never deform or crush.
The following conditions indicate that the
battery power is low:
Cap
l
The KEY indicator light (green) flashes
in the instrument cluster for about 30
seconds after the engine is turned off.
The system does not operate and the
l
operation indicator light on the
transmitter does not flash when the
buttons are pressed.
The system's operational range is
reduced.
CAUTION
Do not turn the cap excessively. The
cap may be damaged.
l
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page74
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (74,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
3. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into
the crack and press the battery out.
qService
If you have a problem with the advanced
keyless functions, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If your advanced key is lost or stolen,
bring all remaining advanced keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make
the lost or stolen advanced key
inoperative.
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
4. Insert the new battery (CR2025 or
equivalent) with the positive pole (
facing the ( ) mark on the cap.
)
5. Rotate and close the cap.
Cap
6. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page75
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (75,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Opening the trunk lid
Operation Using Advanced
Keyless Functions
The operational range for opening the
trunk lid is an area of up to 80 cm (31 in)
from the center of the trunk lid.
qOperational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the advanced key is being
carried.
Exterior transmitter
NOTE
When the battery power is low, or in places
where there are high-intensity radio waves or
noise, the operational range may become
narrower or the system may not operate.
Operational range
Locking, unlocking the doors
Starting the engine
The operational range for locking/
unlocking the doors is an area of up to 80
cm (31 in) from the center of the front
door handles.
The operational range for starting the
engine includes nearly the entire cabin
area.
Exterior transmitter
Interior transmitter
Operational range
Operational range
NOTE
The system may not operate if you are too
close to the windows, door handles.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page76
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (76,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
NOTE
To lock
l
The trunk is out of the operational range,
To lock the doors, press the request
switch. A beep sound will be heard once
and the hazard warning lights will flash
once.
however, starting the engine may be
possible.
The engine may not start if the advanced
l
key is placed in the following areas:
l
NOTE
Around the dashboard
In the storage compartments such as the
l
The hazard warning lights flash when the theft
deterrent system is armed.
glove box
l
The hazard warning lights do not flash if all
the doors are locked before the theft-deterrent
system is properly armed.
When the doors are locked by pressing the
request switch on the front doors while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the hazard
warning lights will flash once to indicate that
the system is armed.
On the rear parcel shelf
l
Starting the engine may be possible even if
the advanced key is outside of the vehicle
and extremely close to a door and window,
however, always start the engine from the
driver's seat.
If the vehicle is started and driven away
while the advanced key is not in the vehicle,
the vehicle will not restart after it is turned
off and the ignition switch is turned to the
Lock position.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
To unlock
l
If the advanced key is detected within
operational range, the operation indicator
light on the transmitter flashes
Driver's door request switch
To unlock the driver's door, press the
request switch. A beep sound will be
heard twice and the hazard warning lights
will flash twice.
To unlock all doors , press the request
switch again within 3 seconds and two
more beep sounds will be heard.
momentarily.
qLocking, Unlocking the Doors
with Request Switch
All doors can be locked/unlocked by
pressing the request switch on the front
doors while the advanced key is being
carried.
NOTE
The hazard warning lights flash when the theft
deterrent system is turned off.
The hazard warning lights do not flash unless
the theft deterrent system has been properly
turned off.
When the doors are unlocked by pressing the
request switch on the front doors while the
theft-deterrent system is turned off, the hazard
warning lights will flash twice to indicate that
the system is turned off.
Request switch
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page77
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (77,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Front passenger door request switch
qOpening the Trunk Lid with
Request Switch
To unlock the doors, press the request
switch. A beep sound will be heard twice
and the hazard warning lights will flash
twice.
The trunk lid can be opened by pressing
the request switch on the under side of the
trunk lid above the license plate while the
advanced key is being carried.
NOTE
l
Confirm that all doors are securely locked.
l
All doors cannot be locked when any door
is open.
Request switch
l
A beep sound is heard for confirmation
when the doors are locked/unlocked using
the request switch. If you prefer, the beep
sound can be turned off (page 3-20).
l
The setting can be changed so that the
doors are locked automatically without
pressing the request switch (page 3-20).
(Auto-lock function)
A beep sound is heard when all doors are
closed while the advanced key is being
carried. All doors are locked automatically
after about 3 seconds when the advanced
key is out of the operational range. Also,
the hazard warning lights flash once. (Even
if the driver is in the operational range, all
doors are locked automatically after about
30 seconds.)
NOTE
If the advanced key is left in the trunk, the
trunk lid will close, however, the trunk lid can
be opened using the request switch and the
vehicle could be stolen.
qStarting the Engine
If you are out of the operational range
before the doors are completely closed, the
auto-lock function will not work. Always
make sure that all doors are closed and
locked before leaving the vehicle.
Ignition switch positions
As there is no a traditional key, some of
the ignition switch functions are different.
l
(Auto re-lock function)
After unlocking all doors by pressing the
request switch, all doors will automatically
lock and the hazard warning light will flash
if any of the following operations are not
performed within about 30 seconds.
Start knob
l
A door is opened.
l
The auxiliary key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
The start knob is pushed.
l
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page78
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (78,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
LOCK (Released)
NOTE
l
If turning the ignition switch is difficult,
jiggle the steering wheel from side to side.
(Automatic transmission)
The steering wheel locks to help protect
against theft.
l
LOCK (Depressed)
The ignition switch cannot be turned from
the ACC position to the LOCK position
when the shift lever is not in P.
The ignition switch can be turned to the
ACC position when the KEY indicator
light (green) illuminates in the instrument
cluster.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel unlocks and some
electrical accessories will operate.
NOTE
The Advanced Keyless Entry System does not
function in the ACC position, and the doors
will not lock/unlock using the transmitter or
request switches even if the advanced key is
carried away from the vehicle.
WARNING
ON
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key or start knob to LOCK
position, set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transmission or in 1 or R
with a manual transmission:
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The warning lights
(except brakes) should be inspected
before the engine is started (page 5-40).
NOTE
It is important to place the key or
start knob in the LOCK position even
if you are not removing the key from
the ignition or leaving the vehicle.
Leaving the key in other positions
will disable some of the vehicle
security systems and run the battery
down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and shifting the shift lever to P with
an automatic transmission, or to 1 or
R with a manual transmission is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur. This could
cause an accident.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This
does not indicate an abnormality.
START
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the start knob;
then it returns to the ON position. The
brake warning light can be checked after
the engine is started (page 5-40).
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page79
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (79,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Starting the engine
5. (Manual transmission)
Depress the clutch pedal all the way
and shift into neutral.
NOTE
l
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while
cranking the engine.
(Automatic transmission)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
requirements regulating the impulse
electrical field strength of radio noise.
The advanced key must be carried because
the advanced key carries an immobilizer
chip that must communicate with the engine
controls at short range.
When starting the engine, be sure the start
knob is securely attached before trying to
operate it. If the knob becomes detached
from the ignition switch, re-attach it by
pushing it on to the ignition switch.
l
l
NOTE
(Manual transmission)
The starter will not operate if the clutch pedal
is not depressed all the way.
(Automatic transmission)
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is
not in P or N.
6. Push the start knob slowly all the way
in.
1. Make sure the advanced key is being
carried.
2. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. Depress the brake pedal.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page80
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (80,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
7. Verify that the KEY indicator light
(green) illuminates in the instrument
cluster. The KEY warning light (red)
means you cannot continue to start the
engine using the Advanced Keyless
System. You may have to use the
auxiliary key instead (page 3-21).
9. Turn the ignition switch from the ACC
position to the START position and
hold (up to 10 seconds at a time) until
the engine starts.
CAUTION
Do not try the starter for more than
10 seconds at a time. If the engine
stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds
before trying again. Otherwise, you
may damage the starter and drain
the battery.
10. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about 15 seconds.Then perform the
shift operation.
NOTE
In the following cases, the KEY warning light
(red) illuminates and the engine will not start.
NOTE
l
The advanced key battery is dead.
l
In extremely cold weather (below 0°C
l
The advanced key is out of operational
(32°F)) or after the vehicle has not been
driven in several days, let the engine warm
up without operating the accelerator.
range.
l
The advanced key is placed in areas where
it is difficult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer similar to
l
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without use of the
accelerator.
l
the advanced key is in the operational
range.
l
The display of the variable red zone in the
tachometer changes according to the
temperature of the engine coolant. To
protect the engine, when the engine coolant
temperature is low, the engine does not run
at high speeds. The fuel supply will be cut
at an rpm lower than the red zone.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position while pushing the start knob
in.
Refer to Tachometer on page 5-37.
l
If the engine does not start the first time,
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-19).
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page81
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (81,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Turning off the engine
NOTE
l
When turning the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, the ignition switch has to
NOTE
For improved engine starting performance the
be pushed in from the ACC position and
turned. Without being pushed in, the
ignition switch stops at the ACC position
and the vehicle battery may be discharged
if the ignition switch is left in the ACC
position. When leaving the vehicle, make
sure the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
If the vehicle is left with the ignition switch
not in the LOCK position, a beep sound is
heard and the indicator light flashes to
notify the driver.
next time you start the engine after only
driving the vehicle a short distance, turn off
the engine after 1 or more of the variable red
zone lamps in the tachometer have turned off.
1. Move the shift lever to the P position
(Automatic transmission).
2. Turn the ignition switch from the ON
position to the ACC position.
l
NOTE
When the engine is turned off and the ignition
switch it turned from the ACC position to the
LOCK position, the KEY indicator light
(green) flashes in the instrument cluster for
about 30 seconds if the battery power of the
advanced key is low. Replace the battery with a
new one.
Refer to Warning Beep (page 3-18).
Refer to Battery Replacement (page 3-6).
3. Push in the start knob from the ACC
position and turn it to the LOCK
position.
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page82
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (82,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Transmitter
Operation Using Advanced
Key Functions
Operation indicator light
Panic button
qKeyless Entry System
This system uses the more traditional
keyless entry buttons to remotely lock and
unlock the doors and opens the trunk lid,
and opens the power windows.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
Lock button
Trunk button
Unlock button
NOTE
l
The keyless entry system is designed to
NOTE
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due
to local conditions.
l
(U.S.A.)
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
l
The system does not operate when the
auxiliary key is in the ignition switch.
With the start knob installed in the LOCK
position, the system is fully operational. If
the ignition switch is not in the LOCK
position or the start knob is pushed in, the
system does not operate.
All doors cannot be locked by pressing the
lock button while any door is open. The
hazard warning lights will also not flash.
l
l
(CANADA)
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
l
l
If the transmitter does not operate when
pressing a button or the operational range
becomes too small, the battery may be
dead. To install a new battery, refer to
Maintenance (page 3-5).
NOTE
The unlock button can be used to open the
power windows. Refer to Opening the Power
Windows from Outside (page 3-40).
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors, press the lock button. A
beep sound will be heard once and the
hazard warning lights will flash once.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page83
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (83,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
To confirm that all doors have been
locked, press the lock button again within
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,
the horn will sound.
NOTE
The hazard warning lights flash when the theft
deterrent system is turned off.
The hazard warning lights do not flash unless
the theft deterrent system has been properly
turned off.
When the doors are unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter while the
theft-deterrent system is turned off, the hazard
warning lights will flash twice to indicate that
the system is turned off.
NOTE
The hazard warning lights flash when the theft
deterrent system is armed.
The hazard warning lights do not flash if all
the doors are locked before the theft-deterrent
system is properly armed.
When the doors are locked by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter while the theft-
deterrent system is armed, the hazard warning
lights will flash once to indicate that the
system is armed.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
NOTE
(Auto re-lock function)
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
After unlocking with the transmitter, All doors
will automatically lock and the hazard
warning light will flash if any of the following
operations are not performed within about 30
seconds.
NOTE
l
All doors cannot be locked when any door
is open.
l
A door is opened.
l
Confirm that all doors are locked visually
l
The auxiliary key is inserted into the
or audibly by use of the double click.
ignition switch.
l
The start knob is pressed.
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button. A beep will be heard twice
and the hazard warning lights will flash
twice.
Trunk button
To open the trunk, press the trunk button
for more than 1 second.
Panic button
To unlock all doors, press the unlock
button again within 3 seconds and two
more beep sounds will be heard.
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, pressing the panic button will
activate the vehicle's alarm.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any door
is open or closed.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page84
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (84,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
(Turning on the alarm)
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the
following will occur:
l
The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights flash.
l
NOTE
However, if the driver is too close to the
vehicle the panic button may not function.
(Turning off the alarm)
The alarm stops by pressing any button on
the transmitter.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page85
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (85,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
qAuxiliary Key Function
Advanced Key Suspend
Function
Use the auxiliary key stored in the
advanced key in the event of a dead
transmitter battery or malfunction.
If one key is left in the vehicle or trunk
and the second key is used to lock the
vehicle, the functions of the advanced key
left in the vehicle or the trunk are
temporarily suspended to prevent theft of
the vehicle.
Removing the auxiliary key
Pull out the auxiliary key from the
advanced key.
The following are inoperable:
l
Starting the engine using the start
knob.
l
Operating the request switches.
To restore these functions, perform any
one of the following:
l
Press the lock or unlock button on the
advanced key which has had its
functions suspended.
While carrying another advanced key,
l
push in the start knob until the KEY
indicator light (green) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
Insert the auxiliary key and turn the
ignition switch to the ON position.
Locking, unlocking the doors
The doors can be locked/unlocked using
the auxiliary key, refer to Locking,
Unlocking with Key (page 3-28).
l
Opening the trunk lid
The trunk lid can be opened using the
auxiliary key, refer to Opening and
Closing the Trunk Lid (page 3-33).
Starting the engine
The engine can be started with the
auxiliary key, refer to Ignition Switch
(page 5-2).
Locking, unlocking the glove box
The glove box can be locked/unlocked
using the auxiliary key, refer to Glove
Box (page 6-84).
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page86
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (86,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
qAdvanced Key Removed from
Warning and Beep Sounds
Vehicle Warning Beep
q
System Malfunction Warning Light
Under the following conditions, a beep
sound will be heard and the KEY warning
light (red) will flash continuously when
the start knob has not been returned to the
LOCK position to notify the driver that
the advanced key has been removed. The
KEY warning light (red) will stop flashing
when the advanced key is back inside the
vehicle:
If any malfunction occurs in the advanced
keyless function, the KEY warning light
(red) in the instrument cluster illuminates
continuously.
CAUTION
If the KEY warning light (red) remains
illuminated, do not continue to drive
the vehicle with the advanced keyless
function. Park the vehicle in a safe
place and use the auxiliary key to
continue driving the vehicle. Have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
l
The start knob has not been returned to
the LOCK position, the driver's door is
open, and the advanced key is removed
from the vehicle. (A beep sound will be
heard three times.)
However the beep sound will be heard
continuously when the start knob is in
the ACC position and the door is open
due to the activation of the warning
beep sound indicating that the start
knob is not in the LOCK position.
qStart Knob Not in LOCK
Warning Beep
l
The start knob has not been returned to
If the start knob is in the ACC position
and the driver's door is opened, a
the LOCK position and all the doors
are closed after removing the advanced
key from the vehicle. (A beep sound
will be heard six times.)
continuous beep sound will be heard to
notify the driver that the start knob has not
been returned to the LOCK position. In
this case, the keyless entry system does
not operate, the car cannot be locked, and
the battery will run down.
NOTE
Because the advanced key utilizes low-intensity
radio waves, the Advanced Key Removed From
Vehicle Warning may activate if the advanced
key is carried together with a metal object or it
is placed in a poor signal reception area
within the vehicle.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page87
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (87,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
l
The advanced key is placed in areas
where it is difficult for the system to
detect the signal (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer
similar to the advanced key is in the
operational range.
qRequest Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep
If the request switch for a front door is
pressed under the following conditions
while the advanced key is being carried, a
beep will be heard 6 times to indicate that
the front doors cannot be locked.
l
qAdvanced Key Left-in-trunk
l
A door is open (door ajar included).
The start knob has not been returned to
Warning Beep
l
the LOCK position.
The auxiliary key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
If the advanced key is left in the trunk
compartment with all doors locked and
the trunk lid closed, a beep sound is heard
for about 10 seconds to remind the driver
the advanced key has been left in the
trunk compartment. If this happens, open
the trunk lid by pressing the request
switch and remove the advanced key. An
advanced key removed from the trunk
may not function because its functions
may have been temporarily suspended. To
restore the advanced key function,
perform the applicable procedure (page
l
qAdvanced Key Battery Dead
Warning
When the start knob is returned to the
ACC or LOCK position from the ON
position, the KEY indicator light (green)
flashes for approximately 30 seconds
indicating that the remaining battery
power is low. Replace with a new battery
before the advanced key becomes
unusable.
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance
(page 3-5).
qAdvanced Key Left-in-vehicle
Warning Beep
NOTE
If an advanced key is left in the vehicle
cabin and all doors are locked using a
separate advanced key, a beep sound is
heard for about 10 seconds to remind the
driver that the advanced key has been left
in the vehicle cabin. If this happens, the
doors lock but the functions of the
advanced key left in the vehicle cabin
may be temporarily suspended. Perform
the following procedure to restore the
functions of the advanced key (page
The advanced key can be set so that the KEY
indicator light (green) does not flash even if
the battery power is low.
Refer to Setting Change (page 3-20).
q
Engine Start Not Permitted Warning
Under the following conditions, the KEY
warning light (red) flashes to inform the
driver that the start knob will not rotate to
the ACC position even if it is pushed in
from the LOCK position.
Refer to the Setting Change (Function
customization) on page 3-20.
l
The advanced key battery is dead.
The advanced key is not within
l
operational range.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page88
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (88,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
Setting Change (Function Customization)
The following function settings are possible. These settings can only be changed by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
After Setting
Change
Setting
Function
At Initial Setting
Advanced key battery KEY indicator light (green) flashes to indicate
dead indicator that the advanced key battery power is low.
Lock/unlock operation A beep sound is heard to confirm that all doors or
Activated
Deactivated
confirmation beep
the trunk lid have been locked/unlocked.
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
sound*1
When all doors are closed and the advanced key
is being carried and out of operational range, all
the doors automatically lock after 3 seconds.
(Even if the driver is in the operational range, all
doors are locked automatically after about 30 sec-
onds.)
Autolock function*2
Deactivated
*1: When the autolock function is operating, the warning sound will be heard regardless of the setting.
*2: When the autolock function is enabled, windows will not automatically close. You must close them before
leaving vehicle.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page89
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (89,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Advanced Keyless Entry and Start System
When Warning Indicator/Beep is Activated
Under the following conditions, warning beeps are heard and a warning/indicator light in
the instrument cluster illuminates to notify the driver of improper operation of the
advanced key to prevent theft of the vehicle (page 3-18).
Warning
How to check
When a door is open, a continuous beep sound will be Check whether the start knob has been returned to the
heard.
LOCK position.
When a door is open, three beep sounds are heard, and
the KEY warning light (red) in the instrument cluster
flashes.
Check whether the advanced key has been removed
from the vehicle.
When a door is closed, a beep sound is heard six times,
and the KEY warning light (red) in the instrument
cluster flashes.
Check whether the advanced key has been removed
from the vehicle.
When locking the doors or closing the trunk, the chime Check whether the advanced key has been left in the
sounds for about ten seconds.
vehicle or the trunk.
Check whether the start knob has been returned to the
LOCK position.
When attempting to lock the doors by pressing the
request switch on the front doors, and six beep sounds
are heard.
Check whether a door is open.
The advanced key battery power is low. Replace the
battery with a new one.
Refer to Advanced Key Maintenance on page 3-5.
When the KEY indicator light (green) flashes in the
instrument cluster.
The advanced key is malfunctioning. Park the vehicle in
When the KEY warning light (red) remains illuminated a safe place, and use the auxiliary key to continue
in the instrument cluster.
driving the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page90
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (90,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key.
Keys (without Advanced Key)
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
NOTE
l
Write down the code number and keep it in
a separate, safe and convenient place, but
not in the vehicle.
If your key is lost, consult your Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have your code number
ready.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. Children may find these new
kinds of keys to be an interesting toy
to play with and could cause the
power windows or other controls to
operate, or even make the vehicle
move.
l
Some types of key chains cannot be
attached to the retractable type key. In this
case, use the key ring provided with the
transmitter which has the key code number
plate attached.
NOTE
l
information regarding keys and engine
starting.
l
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System (page 3-53)
for information regarding keys and the
prevention of vehicle and vehicle contents
theft.
The keys operate all locks.
Key ring
Retractable
type key
Key code number plate
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page91
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (91,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Key extend/retract method (Retractable
type key)
Keyless Entry System (with
Retractable Type Key)
To extend the key, press the release
button.
This system remotely locks and unlocks
the doors and opens the trunk lid, and
opens the power windows.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Operating the theft-deterrent system with
the keyless entry system transmitter is
also possible.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the transmitter,
do not:
Ø Drop the transmitter.
Ø Get the transmitter wet.
Ø Disassemble the transmitter.
Ø Expose the transmitter to any kind
of magnetic field.
To retract the key, rotate it into the holder
while pressing the release button.
Ø Expose the transmitter to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page92
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (92,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qTransmitter
l
The keyless entry system is designed to
operate up to about 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
center of the vehicle, but this may vary due
to local conditions.
Lock button
Unlock button
l
l
Panic button
The system does not operate when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Doors can be locked by pressing the lock
button while any other door is open.
However, the hazard warning lights will not
flash and the horn will not sound.
If the transmitter does not operate when
pressing a button or the operation range
becomes too small, the battery may be
dead. To install a new battery, refer to
Maintenance (page 3-26).
Additional transmitters can be obtained at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 3
transmitters can be used with the keyless
entry system per vehicle. Bring all
transmitters to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer when additional transmitters are
required.
Operation
indicator light
l
Trunk button
NOTE
l
(U.S.A.)
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
l
l
(CANADA)
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
The unlock button can be used to open the
power windows. Refer to Opening the Power
Windows from Outside (page 3-40).
The operation indicator light flashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors, press the lock button
and the hazard warning lights will flash
once.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page93
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (93,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
To confirm that all doors have been
locked, press the lock button again within
5 seconds. If they are closed and locked,
the horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will flash once.
NOTE
The hazard warning lights flash when the theft
deterrent system is turned off.
The hazard warning lights do not flash unless
the theft deterrent system has been properly
turned off.
When the doors are unlocked by pressing the
unlock button on the transmitter while the
theft-deterrent system is turned off, the hazard
warning lights will flash twice to indicate that
the system is turned off.
NOTE
l
Pressing the transmitter lock button to lock
the doors while any door is open does not
sound the horn.
l
The hazard warning lights flash when the
theft deterrent system is armed.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
The hazard warning lights do not flash if all
the doors are locked before the theft-
deterrent system is properly armed.
When the doors are locked by pressing the
lock button on the transmitter while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the hazard
warning lights will flash once to indicate
that the system is armed.
NOTE
Auto re-lock function
After unlocking with the transmitter, all doors
will automatically lock if one of the doors is
not opened within about 30 seconds.
Refer to the theft-deterrent system on page
Trunk button
To open the trunk, press the trunk button
for more than 1 second.
NOTE
l
All doors cannot be locked when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Confirm that all doors are locked visually
or audibly by use of the double click.
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, pressing the panic button will
activate the vehicle's alarm.
l
Unlock button
NOTE
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button and the hazard warning
lights will flash twice.
The panic button will work whether any door
is open or closed.
Turning on the alarm
To unlock all doors, press the unlock
button again within 5 seconds and the
hazard warning lights will flash twice.
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the
following will occur:
l
The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights flash.
l
Turning off the alarm
Press any button on the transmitter.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page94
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (94,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into
the slot and push the tab to remove the
key from the transmitter.
qTransmitter Maintenance
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not flash, the battery may be
dead.
Tab
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
CAUTION
Ø Install the battery with the positive
pole ( ) facing down. Battery
leakage could occur if it is not
installed correctly.
Ø When replacing the battery, be
careful not to bend the electrical
terminals or get oil on them. Also
be careful not to get dirt in the
transmitter as it could be
damaged.
3. Insert a small flathead screwdriver into
the slot and gently pry open the
transmitter.
Ø There is the danger of explosion if
the battery is not correctly
replaced.
Ø Replace only with the same type
battery (CR1620 or equivalent).
Ø Dispose of used batteries
according to the following
instructions.
Ø
Insulate the plus and minus
terminals of the battery using
cellophane or equivalent tape.
Never disassemble.
Never throw the battery into
fire and/or water.
Never deform or crush.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Replacing the transmitter battery
1. Unfold the key (page 3-22).
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page95
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (95,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
4. Press the portion of the battery
7. Align the key with the transmitter as
shown in the figure, and insert the key
until a click sound is heard.
indicated by A and remove the battery.
A
NOTE
If it is difficult to remove the battery by
pressing with a finger, use a small flathead
screwdriver to press out the battery.
CAUTION
Insert the key into the transmitter
securely until a click sound is heard.
If it is not inserted securely, it could
detach from the transmitter.
5. Put in the new battery (CR1620 or
equivalent) with the positive pole (
facing down.
)
qService
If you have a problem with the keyless
entry system, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If your transmitter is lost or stolen, bring
all remaining transmitters to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make
the lost or stolen transmitter inoperative.
CAUTION
6. Align the front and back covers and
snap the transmitter shut.
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page96
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (96,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qLocking, Unlocking with Key
Door Locks
The driver's door can be locked/unlocked
with the key.
Turn the key toward the front to unlock,
toward the back to lock.
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
Leaving a child or a pet unattended
in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In
hot weather, temperatures inside a
vehicle can become high enough to
cause brain damage or even death.
Unlock
Do not leave the key in your vehicle
with children and keep them in a place
where your children will not find or
play with them:
Lock
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
qLocking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (with Advanced Key)
Keep all doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall
out if a door is accidentally opened
and can more easily be thrown out in
an accident.
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the request switch while
carrying the advanced key outside the
vehicle, refer to Operations Using
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).
qLocking, Unlocking with
Always close all the windows and the
moonroof, lock the doors and take the
key with you when leaving your vehicle
unattended:
Transmitter (with Advanced Key)
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-14).
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle
left unlocked becomes an easy target
for thieves and intruders.
q
Locking, Unlocking with Transmitter
(with Retractable Type Key)
The doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-23).
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page97
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (97,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
qLocking, Unlocking with Door-
l
(With advanced key)
Lock Knob
The driver's door cannot be locked using
the door-lock knob from the outside.
(Without advanced key)
The driver's door cannot be locked using
the door-lock knob from the outside if the
key is in the ignition switch.
To lock either front door from the inside,
push the door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it out.
l
l
When locking the doors this way, be careful
not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
Door-lock knob
Lock
qPower Door Locks
Vehicle lock-out prevention
(With advanced key)
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle. All doors will automatically
unlock if they are locked using the power
door locks with any door open.
Unlock
To lock either front door with the door-
lock knob from the outside, push the
door-lock knob to the lock position and
close the door.
(Without advanced key)
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle. With the key in the ignition
switch, all doors will automatically unlock
if they are locked using the power door
locks with any door open.
Door-lock knob
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page98
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:32 AM
Black plate (98,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Locking, unlocking with key
Driver's door
All doors lock automatically when the
driver's door is locked with the key. All
doors unlock when the driver's door is
unlocked and the key is held in the unlock
position for one second or longer.
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Passenger's door
Lock
NOTE
Holding the key in the unlocked position in the
driver's door lock for about a second unlocks
all doors. To unlock only the driver's door,
insert the key into the driver's door lock and
turn the key briefly to the unlock position and
then immediately return it to the center
position.
Unlock
Lock
Locking, unlocking with request switch
(with advanced key)
Locking, unlocking with door-lock
switch
All doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the request switch on the front
doors while carrying the advanced key
outside the vehicle, refer to Operations
Using Advanced Keyless Functions (page
All doors lock automatically when LOCK
is pressed. They all unlock when the
unmarked part of the door-lock switch is
pressed.
Locking, unlocking with transmitter
(with advanced key)
All doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-14).
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page99
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (99,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Locking, unlocking with transmitter
(with retractable type key)
CAUTION
Before closing a front door make sure
other passengers are not operating a
rear door and a rear passenger's
head or hands are away from the
rear door. If the front door is closed
while a passenger is operating the
rear door handle, a hand or fingers
could be injured if the handle is
forced back. Also, a rear passenger
could hit their head against the door
during access to the rear seat.
All doors can be locked/unlocked by
operating the keyless entry system
transmitter, refer to Keyless Entry System
(page 3-23).
qFreestyle Doors
The pillarless freestyle doors are front and
rear-hinged for ease of ingress and egress
to the rear seat.
Opening the freestyle doors
NOTE
l
1. Open the front door first.
The rear door cannot be opened while the
front door is closed.
l
Make sure the front seatbelt is unfastened
before the rear door is opened. The rear
door cannot be opened with the front
seatbelt fastened because the front seatbelt
may lock.
l
If any door is left open for more than about
an hour, the front seatbelt will lock, and the
rear door cannot be opened. If this
happens, close all doors and open the rear
door again.
Front door
l
This vehicle is not equipped with child
safety locks due to the design of the front
and rear doors. The rear doors must be
closed before the front doors, and the rear
doors cannot be opened until the front
doors are opened.
2. Pull the rear door handle and open the
rear door.
Rear door handle
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page100
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (100,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Closing the freestyle doors
WARNING
1. Close the rear door first, and then close
the front door.
Make sure the rear door is closed
securely before closing the front door:
Driving with the doors not securely
closed is dangerous. If the rear door
is not completely closed, the front
door will not be securely closed. This
could cause the front door to open
unexpectedly while driving and may
result in an accident.
Front door
Rear door
CAUTION
Before closing a front door make sure
other passengers are not operating a
rear door and a rear passenger's
head or hands are away from the
rear door. If the front door is closed
while a passenger is operating the
rear door handle, a hand or fingers
could be injured if the handle is
forced back. Also, a rear passenger
could hit their head against the door
during access to the rear seat.
NOTE
The front door cannot latch or lock while the
rear door is opened.
2. Make sure the freestyle doors are
securely closed.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page101
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (101,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qOpening and Closing the Trunk
Trunk Lid
WARNING
WARNING
Close the trunk lid and do not allow
children to play inside the vehicle:
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in
possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
Never allow a person to ride in the
trunk:
Allowing a person to ride in the trunk
is dangerous. In addition, the person
in the trunk could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden
braking or a collision.
Keep the trunk closed when driving:
Exhaust gas entering the cabin of a
vehicle through an open trunk is
dangerous. This gas contains CO
(carbon monoxide), which is
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by latching the
doors and the trunk, and keeping the
keys where children can not play with
them:
colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous. If inhaled, it can cause
loss of consciousness and death.
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars
or trunks can die very quickly from
heat prostration. Do not leave your
children or pets alone in a car at any
time. Do not leave the car or the
trunk unlocked.
Opening the trunk lid with the key
Insert the key into the slot and turn it
clockwise.
Open
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page102
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (102,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Opening the trunk lid with the request
switch (with advanced key)
Closing the trunk lid
Grasp the inner handle and pull the trunk
lid down, then push the trunk lid down
until it locks securely. Be careful not to
slam it. Pull up on the trunk lid to make
sure it is secured.
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the request switch on the trunk lid while
carrying the advanced key outside the
vehicle, refer to Operations Using
Advanced Keyless Functions (page 3-7).
Handle
Opening the trunk lid with the
transmitter (with advanced key)
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-14).
Opening the trunk lid with the
transmitter (with retractable type key)
The trunk lid can be opened by operating
the keyless entry system transmitter, refer
to Keyless Entry System (page 3-23).
qTrunk Light
Opening the trunk lid with the remote
release button
The trunk light is on when the lid is open
and off when it's closed.
Push the release button.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the trunk open for a long period
when the engine is not running.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page103
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (103,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Inside Trunk Release Lever
WARNING
Close the trunk lid and do not allow
children to play inside the vehicle:
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting in
possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside
trunk release lever that provides a means
of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the
trunk.
No matter how careful adults might be
with keys and locking their cars, parents
should be aware that children may be
tempted to play around vehicles and use
the trunk as a hiding place.
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by latching the
doors and the trunk, and keeping the
keys where children can not play with
them:
Adults are advised to familiarize
themselves with the operation and
location of the inside trunk release lever
so that all children can be told about it in
an appropriate way, keeping in mind that
most vehicles do not have such levers.
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars
or trunks can die very quickly from
heat prostration. Do not leave your
children or pets alone in a car at any
time. Do not leave the car or the
trunk unlocked.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page104
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (104,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qOpening the Trunk Lid from the
Power Windows
Inside
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for the power windows to
operate.
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the
direction of the arrow. The lever is made
of material that will glow for hours in the
darkness of the trunk following a brief
exposure to ambient light.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
The inside trunk release lever is located
on the inside of the trunk end trim.
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person's hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury
or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
Always lock the power window with the
power window lock switch on the
driver's side while children are in the
vehicle, and never allow children to
play with power window switches:
Leaving the power window switches
unlocked while children are in the
vehicle is dangerous. Power window
switches that are not locked with the
power window lock switch would
allow children to operate power
windows unintentionally which could
result in serious injury if a child's
hands, head or neck becomes caught
by the window.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page105
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (105,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Manual opening/closing
qOperating the Power Windows
To open a power window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the power window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
NOTE
l
The passenger power window can be
operated with the door switch when the
power window lock switch on the driver's
door is in the unlocked position (page
Owner master control switches
l
The passenger power window can also be
operated by the power window master
control switches on the driver's door.
Open
Close
Owner master control switch
Driver's window
Passenger's
window
Driver's window
Passenger's
window
Passenger switch
l
The following functions can be performed
Open
Close
for the power windows using the power
window master control switches on the
driver's door or passenger's door switch.
l
Manual opening/closing
Auto-opening/closing
Two-step down function
l
l
Auto-opening/closing
To fully open a power window
automatically, press the switch completely
down.
To fully close the power window
automatically, pull the switch completely
up.
To stop the power window partway, pull
or press the switch in the opposite
direction and then release it.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page106
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (106,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
NOTE
(POWER WINDOW RESET PROCEDURE)
If the battery was disconnected during vehicle
maintenance, or for other reasons such as a
switch continues to be operated after the
window is fully open/close, the power windows
will not fully open and close automatically.
Resetting of the automatic function can be
performed using the driver's master control
switch or the passenger door switch.
The power window auto function reset
procedure can be done on one or both door
switches. The power window auto function will
only resume on the side that has been reset.
Pressing the power window switch once when
the window is fully closed will only open it
about 3 cm (1 in) to allow convenient
ventilation of the cabin.
Canceling the two-step down function
To cancel the two-step down function for
the power windows, carry out the
following procedure using the master
control switches.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position and complete the following
procedure within 5 seconds:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
Press the power window switch 2 times
firmly, then pull it 2 times firmly.
2. Make sure that the power window lock
switch located on the driver's door is not
depressed.
Owner master control switches
3. Press the switch and fully open the power
window.
4. Pull up the switch to fully close the power
window and continue holding the switch for
about 2 seconds after the window fully
closes.
Passenger's
window
Driver's window
5. Repeat Steps 3-4 for the passenger power
window.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position.
6. Make sure that the power windows operate
correctly using the door switches.
3. With the ignition switch in the LOCK
position, and within 40 seconds, turn
the ignition switch to the ON position
and complete the following procedure
within 5 seconds:
Two-step down function
With the power window completely
closed, press the switch lightly and it will
open and stop about 3 cm (1 in) from the
top.
If you continue to press and hold the
switch, the window will resume opening
all the way.
Press the power window switch 2 times
firmly, then pull 2 times firmly.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page107
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (107,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
NOTE
l
l
The two-step down function cannot be
Depending on driving conditions, a closing
power window could stop and start opening
when the window feels a shock that is
similar to something blocking it.
In the event the jam-safe function activates
and the power window cannot be closed
automatically, pull and hold the switch fully
and the window will close.
canceled if the procedure is not completed
within the specified times, or the procedure
is changed along the way. To redo the
procedure, first turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position and proceed from the
beginning.
l
If you are unable to cancel the function
l
despite carrying out the cancellation
procedure, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The jam-safe window function does not
operate until the system is re-initialized.
Engine-off power window operation
Restoring the two-step down function
The power window can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned from the ON position to the
ACC or LOCK position with all doors
closed. If any door is opened, the power
window will be inoperable.
With the two-step down function in the
canceled state, repeat the previous
procedure for canceling the function on
each door switch and it will be restored.
NOTE
If you are unable to restore the function despite
doing the restore procedure, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
l
For engine-off operation of the power
window, the switch must be held up firmly
throughout window closure because the
auto-closing function will be inoperable.
Jam-safe window
l
The two-step down function is inoperable
during engine-off operation.
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the manual
closing operation or the auto-closing
operation, the window will stop and open
halfway.
WARNING
Make sure nothing blocks the window
just before it reaches the fully closed
position or while fully holding up the
power window switch:
Blocking the power window just
before it reaches the fully closed
position or while fully holding up the
power window switch is dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the window from
closing all the way. If fingers are
caught, serious injuries could occur.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page108
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (108,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qPower Window Lock Switch
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
With the lock switch in the unlocked
position (button not depressed), all power
windows on each door can be operated.
Closing power windows are
dangerous. A person's hands, head,
or even neck could be caught by the
window and result in serious injury
or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
With the lock switch in the locked
position (button depressed), only the
driver's side power window can be
operated.
Locked position
NOTE
l
The power windows cannot be opened or
closed from outside the vehicle under the
following condition:
l
A door is opened.
The key is inserted into the ignition
Unlocked position
l
switch.
l
The start knob is in any position except
LOCK. (With advanced key)
l
The power windows may not close
completely. Make sure all the windows are
closed.
WARNING
Unless a passenger needs to operate a
power window, keep the power window
lock switch in the locked position:
Unintentional power window
If the power windows cannot be closed
completely, operate each power window
switch from inside the vehicle. After closing
the windows from outside the vehicle, verify
that they are completely closed.
operation is dangerous. A person's
hands, head, or neck could be caught
by the window and result in serious
injury.
Opening
Because nobody likes getting into a very
hot car, Mazda has introduced a way to
open the both windows as you approach
the vehicle to get the air moving before
you get in.
qOpening/Closing the Power
Windows from Outside
Both power windows can be opened or
closed from outside the vehicle after the
doors are closed.
The power windows may be operated
remotely when the power window lock
switch on the driver's door is in the lock
or unlocked position.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page109
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (109,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Retractable type key
WARNING
Use the remote auto-window function
only when you can see the vehicle and
it is in a secure area:
Lock button
Unlock button
Panic button
Do not let children play with your
keys. If they open the window
without your knowing, the open
windows are an even bigger
invitation to a thief than leaving the
doors unlocked.
Operation
indicator light
Trunk button
The windows can be opened for
ventilating the cabin before getting in the
vehicle.
NOTE
l
The unlock button does not operate unless
it is pressed twice sequentially.
The lock button cannot be used to close the
power windows.
With unlock button (Keyless entry
system)
l
Press the unlock button on the transmitter
once, then press again within 1.5 seconds
and hold.
With key
After the doors are unlocked, both
windows open while the unlock button is
pressed.
To stop the windows while opening,
release the button.
If the operation is performed from the
beginning again, the windows open.
Advanced key
1. Insert the key in the driver's door key
cylinder.
2. Turn the key front and hold until the
windows are completely open. After
the doors are unlocked, the windows
fully open automatically.
Lock button
Panic button
Trunk button
Open
Unlock button
To stop this operation, turn the key to the
center position, then turn it front again.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page110
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (110,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
2. Press and hold the request switch on
the driver's door. After the doors are
locked, the windows close as long as
the request switch is pressed.
The window opening operation also can be
stopped by turning the key back. However, the
doors will lock.
Closing
The windows can be closed in case they
are left open after getting out of the
vehicle.
NOTE
Request switch
(With advanced key)
activated, the doors automatically lock as you
walk away from the vehicle, however, the
power windows cannot be closed. When
leaving the vehicle, close the windows using
the power window switch inside the vehicle,
the key, or a request switch on the front door
handles.
To stop the windows from closing, release
the request switch. If the operation is
performed from the beginning again, the
windows close.
With key
1. Insert the key in the driver's door key
cylinder.
2. Turn the key back and hold until the
windows are completely close. After
the doors are locked, the windows
close as long as the key is turned.
Close
With request switch on the driver's
door (Advanced key)
1. If the doors are locked, unlock them.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page111
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (111,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
Rear Quarter Windows
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
Open or close a swing-out rear quarter
window by releasing the latch and moving
the window.
WARNING
When removing the fuel-filler cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for any
hissing to stop. Then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel
tank and the fuel-filler cap is
NOTE
When parked in public areas, it is best to keep
the rear quarter windows closed for security.
qOpening a Window
Pull the latch inward and then push the
window outward.
removed too quickly.
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and flames away
from the filler neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or flames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel-
filler cap or not using a fuel-filler cap
may result in fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
CAUTION
Always use only a genuine Mazda
fuel-filler cap or an approved
equivalent, available at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The wrong
cap can result in a serious
qClosing a Window
Pull the latch inward and then push it
backward until it snaps shut. Make sure
the window is securely closed.
malfunction of the fuel and emission
control systems. It may also cause
the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page112
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (112,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
qFuel-Filler Lid
CAUTION
Make sure the fuel-filler cap is
To open, pull up the remote fuel-filler lid
release.
tightened securely. The check engine
light may illuminate when the cap is
not tightened securely. If the light
remains on (even after you have
tightened the cap securely, driven,
and restarted the engine several
times), it may indicate a different
problem. Contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Remote fuel-filler
lid release
qFuel-Filler Cap
To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
To close the fuel-filler cap, turn it
clockwise until two or more clicks are
heard.
Open
Close
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page113
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (113,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded
area and secure it in the stay hole
indicated by the arrow to hold the hood
open.
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
A hood that is not closed and
securely locked is dangerous as it
could fly open while the vehicle is
moving and block the driver's vision
which could result in a serious
accident.
Clip
qOpening the Hood
Pad
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
Support rod
qClosing the Hood
WARNING
Do not leave items in the engine
compartment:
After you have finished checking or
doing servicing in the engine
compartment, do not forget and
leave items such as tools or rags in
the engine compartment.
Release handle
Tools or other items left in the engine
compartment could cause engine
damage or a fire leading to an
unexpected accident.
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening
and slide the hood latch lever to the
right and lift the hood.
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all filler caps are in place and
all loose items (e.g. tools, oil
containers, etc.) have been removed.
2. Insert the support rod in its clip while
holding up the hood. Verify that the
support rod is secured in the clip before
closing the hood.
3. Close the hood so that it locks securely.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page114
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (114,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Moonroofí
Before washing your Mazda, make sure the
moonroof is completely closed so that water
does not get inside the cabin area. After
washing your Mazda or after it rains, wipe the
water off the moonroof before operating it to
avoid water penetration which could cause
rust and water damage to your headliner.
The moonroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
Slide switch
qTilt Operation
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted
open to provide more ventilation.
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily
press the rear of the tilt switch.
To stop tilting partway, press any part of
the tilt or slide switch.
Tilt switch
WARNING
To close to the desired position, press the
front of the tilt or slide switch.
Do not let passengers stand up or
extend part of their body through the
open moonroof while the vehicle is
moving:
Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the
moonroof is dangerous. The head or
arms could hit something while the
vehicle is moving. This could cause
serious injury or death.
Tilt up
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing the moonroof:
Close
Close
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a
person ―especially a child― could
be caught in it as it closes, causing
serious injury or even death.
qSlide Operation
To fully open automatically, momentarily
press the rear of the slide switch.
To stop sliding partway, press any part of
the tilt or slide switch.
3-46
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page115
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (115,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Doors and Locks
To close to the desired position, press the
front of the tilt or slide switch.
qSunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.
The sunshade opens automatically when
the moonroof is opened, but must be
closed by hand.
Open
Sunshade
Close
Close
q
Power Moonroof Re-set Procedure
If the battery is disconnected, the
moonroof may not operate correctly. The
moonroof will not operate correctly until
it is re-set. Carry out the following
procedure to re-set the moonroof and
resume operation:
CAUTION
Ø The sunshade does not tilt. To
avoid damaging the sunshade, do
not push up on it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
Ø Do not close the sunshade while
the moonroof is opening. Trying to
force the sunshade closed could
damage it.
2. Press and hold the front of the SLIDE
switch with the moonroof closed
completely. The moonroof lowers
slightly and returns to its original
position when the re-setting is finished.
NOTE
Re-set cannot be performed with the moonroof
open. Close the moonroof completely before
re-setting.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page116
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (116,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Immobilizer System (with
Advanced Key)
CAUTION
Do not allow the following when
starting the engine with the auxiliary
key due to an advanced key dead
battery or other malfunction.
Otherwise the signal from the
auxiliary key will not be received
correctly and the engine may not
start.
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the auxiliary key
grip.
Ø Spare auxiliary keys or keys for
other vehicles equipped with an
immobilizer system touch or come
near the auxiliary key.
The immobilizer system allows the engine
to start only with an advanced key the
system recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized advanced key, the
engine will not start, thereby helping to
prevent the theft of your vehicle.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the advanced key
(including auxiliary key), consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Ø Radio equipment like this is
governed by laws in the United
States.
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage which touch or
come near the auxiliary key.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do
not:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page117
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (117,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
qOperation
l
(U.S.A.)
Arming
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The system is armed when the ignition
switch is turned from the ON position to
the ACC or LOCK position. The security
indicator light in the instrument cluster
flashes every 2 seconds until the system is
disarmed.
l
(CANADA)
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Disarming
l
The advanced keys (including auxiliary key)
The system is disarmed when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the registered advanced key.
The security indicator light illuminates for
about 3 seconds and goes out.
carry a unique electronic code. For this
reason, and to assure your safety, obtaining
a replacement advanced key (including
auxiliary key) requires some waiting time.
They are only available through an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
If the engine does not start with the
correct advanced key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating or
flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Always keep a spare advanced key in case
one is lost. If an advanced key is lost,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as
soon as possible.
l
If you lose an advanced key (including
auxiliary key), an Authorized Mazda Dealer
will reset the electronic codes of your
remaining advanced keys (including
auxiliary keys) and immobilizer system.
Bring all the remaining advanced keys
(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not
been reset is not possible.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page118
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (118,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
qModification and Add-On
l
The engine may not start and the security
Equipment
indicator light may illuminate or flash if the
advanced key is placed in an area where it
is difficult for the system to detect the
signal, such as on the dashboard, or in the
glove box. Move the advanced key to
another place, turn the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, and then restart the
engine.
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
system's operation if the system has been
modified or if any add-on equipment has
been installed.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
system or the vehicle.
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from
a transceiver or a mobile telephone could
interfere with your immobilizer system. If
you are using the proper advanced key and
the engine fails to start, check the security
indicator light. If the indicator light is
flashing, turn the ignition switch to the
ACC or LOCK position and wait for a
while, then restart the engine. If it does not
start after 3 or more tries, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
If the security indicator light flashes
continuously while you are driving, do not
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If the
engine is shut off while the indicator light is
flashing, you will not be able to restart it.
l
Since the electronic codes are reset when
repairing the immobilizer system, the
advanced key (including auxiliary key) are
needed. Bring all the advanced keys
(including auxiliary keys) to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page119
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (119,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
Immobilizer System
CAUTION
(without Advanced Key)
When starting the engine do not
allow the following, as the engine
may not start due to the electronic
signal from the ignition key not being
transmitted correctly.
The immobilizer system allows the engine
to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
Ø A key ring rests on the key grip.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine will
not start, thereby helping to prevent the
theft of your vehicle.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal
CAUTION
Ø Radio equipment like this is
governed by laws in the United
States.
objects touch the key grip.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Ø To avoid damage to the key, do
not:
Ø Spare keys or keys for other
vehicles equipped with an
immobilizer system touch or come
near the key grip.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic field.
Ø
Expose the key to high
temperatures on places such as
the dashboard or hood, under
direct sunlight.
Ø Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage which touch or
come near the key.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page120
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (120,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
qOperation
l
(U.S.A.)
Arming
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The system is armed when the ignition
switch is turned from the ON to the ACC
or LOCK position.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster flashes every two
seconds until the system is disarmed.
l
(CANADA)
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry CANADA. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Disarming
l
The keys carry a unique electronic code.
The system is disarmed when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the correct ignition key.
The security indicator light illuminates for
about three seconds and goes out.
For this reason, and to assure your safety,
obtaining a replacement key requires some
waiting time. They are only available
through an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
Always keep a spare key, in case one is lost.
If a key is lost, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has not
been reset is not possible.
If the engine does not start with the
correct ignition key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating or
flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page121
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (121,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
NOTE
Theft-Deterrent System
l
If the security indicator light illuminates
and stays on or flashes when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, the
engine will not start.
If the theft deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle, which
could result in the vehicle or its contents
being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and flashing the hazard
warning lights.
l
Signals from a TVor radio station, or from
a transceiver or a mobile telephone, could
interfere with your immobilizer system. If
you are using the proper key and your
engine fails to start, check the security
indicator light. If it is flashing, remove the
ignition key and wait 2 seconds or more,
then reinsert it and try starting the engine
again. If it does not start after 3 or more
tries, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Operation on page 3-53.
NOTE
l
The theft-deterrent system operates with the
key or the keyless entry system transmitter.
l
(With advanced key)
The theft-deterrent system can also be
operated using the advanced keyless
function.
The system operates only when the driver is
in the vehicle or within operational range
while the advanced key is being carried.
l
If the security indicator light flashes
continuously while you are driving, do not
shut off the engine. Go to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and have it checked. If you
shut off the engine while the light is
flashing you will not be able to restart it.
Since the electronic codes are reset when
l
The system will not function unless it is
l
properly armed. To properly secure the
vehicle, always make sure all windows are
completely closed and all doors and the
trunk lid are locked before leaving the
vehicle. Remember to take your key and
transmitter.
repairing the immobilizer system, the keys
are needed. Bring all the existing keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qModification and Add-On
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
system's operation if the system has been
modified or if any add-on equipment has
been installed.
qOperation
System triggering conditions
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights flash for about 3
minutes when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
CAUTION
To avoid damage to your vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
system or the vehicle.
l
Forcing open a door, the hood or the
trunk lid.
l
Unlocking a door with the inside door-
lock knob.
Unlocking a door with the door lock
l
switch.
l
Opening the hood by operating the
hood release handle.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page122
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (122,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
l
Opening the trunk lid by operating the
NOTE
trunk lid release button.
Locking the doors with the inside door-lock
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until a door is
unlocked or the trunk lid is opened with
the key or with the transmitter.
(With advanced key)
The lights and horn can also be
deactivated by pressing the request switch
on a door.
knob will not arm the system.
NOTE
When the doors are locked by pressing the lock
button on the transmitter or request switch on
the front doors or using the key while the theft-
deterrent system is armed, the hazard warning
lights will flash once to indicate that the
system is armed.
NOTE
If the battery goes dead while the theft-
deterrent system is armed, the horn will
activate and the hazard warning lights will
flash when the battery is charged or replaced.
qTo Turn off an Armed System
An armed system can be turned off by any
one of the following methods:
l
Unlock a door with the key.
Press the unlock button on the keyless
l
qHow to Arm the System
entry system transmitter.
Insert the key into the ignition switch
1. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
l
and turn it to the ON position.
(With advanced key)
Turn the start knob to the LOCK
position.
l
(With advanced key)
l
Press a request switch on the doors
or the unlock button on the
transmitter.
Turn the start knob to the ON
2. Make sure the hood and the trunk lid
are closed. Close and lock all doors
from the outside using the key or press
the lock button on your keyless entry
system transmitter.
l
position.
The hazard warning lights will flash twice
to indicate that the system is turned off.
The hazard warning lights will flash
once to indicate that the system is
armed.
(With advanced key)
Press a request switch on the doors or
NOTE
l
The trunk lid can be opened with the key or
the transmitter even when the system is
armed. The alarm will not come on and the
system will remain armed.
the lock button on the transmitter.
l
When the doors are unlocked by pressing
(Without advanced key)
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Close the hood and the trunk lid . Press
the area on the door-lock switch
marked “LOCK” once. Close all doors.
the unlock button on the transmitter or
request switch on the front doors or using
the key while the theft-deterrent system is
turned off, the hazard warning lights will
flash twice to indicate that the system is
turned off.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page123
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (123,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Security System
qTo Stop an Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off by
any one of the following methods:
l
Unlock a door with the key.
Open the trunk lid with the key.
Press the unlock button or press and
l
l
hold the trunk button on the keyless
entry system transmitter.
l
(With advanced key)
l
Press a request switch on the doors.
Press the unlock button or press and
l
hold the trunk button on the
transmitter.
NOTE
If you have any problem with the theft-
deterrent system, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
qTheft-Deterrent Labels
A label indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is
in the glove compartment.
Mazda recommends that you affix it to the
lower rear corner of a front door window.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page124
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (124,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
Steering Wheel
Mirrors
qOutside Mirrors
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Check the mirror angles before driving.
Mirror type
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control
or an accident.
Flat type (driver's side)
Flat surface mirror.
Convex type (front passenger side)
The mirror has single curvature on its
surface.
WARNING
qTilt Steering Wheel
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
To change the angle of the steering wheel,
stop the vehicle, pull the tilt wheel release
lever under the steering column down,
adjust the wheel, then push the release
lever up to lock the column.
Changing lanes without taking into
account the actual distance of the
vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
Tilt wheel release
lever
Power mirror
The ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON position.
To adjust:
1. Press the left or right side of the
selector switch to choose the left or
right side mirror.
After adjusting, push the wheel up and
down to be certain it's locked before
driving.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page125
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (125,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
2. Depress the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
qRearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Selector switch
Outside mirror
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror,
which might cause you to hit another
car when changing lanes.
Mirror switch
Rearview mirror adjustment
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
After adjusting the mirror, lock the control
by placing the selector switch in the
middle position.
Manual day/night mirror
Folding the mirror
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is
locked.
Auto-dimming mirror
WARNING
Always return the outside mirrors to
the driving position before you start
driving:
Driving with the outside mirrors
folded in is dangerous. Your rear view
will be restricted, and you could have
an accident.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page126
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (126,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
NOTE
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The
indicator light will turn off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON button ( ). The
indicator light will illuminate.
For the manual day/night mirror, perform the
adjustment with the day/night lever in the day
position.
Reducing glare from headlights
Manual day/night mirror
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from cars at the rear.
Day/Night lever
OFF button
ON button
Indicator light
Day
Night
Auto-dimming mirror
The auto-dimming mirror automatically
reduces glare of headlights from cars at
the rear when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page127
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (127,1)
Knowing Your Mazda
Steering Wheel and Mirrors
NOTE
l
Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects
on or around the light sensor. Otherwise,
light sensor sensitivity will be affected and
may not operate normally.
Light sensor
Light sensor
l
For information regarding the 3 buttons
(
,
,
) on the auto-dimming
mirror, refer to HomeLink Wireless Control
System (page 5-68).
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page128
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (128,1)
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page129
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (129,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
4
Important information about driving your Mazda.
Towing ......................................................................................... 4-13
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page130
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (130,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel
Octane Rating*(Anti-knock index)
Premium unleaded fuel
91 [ (R M)/2 method] or above (96 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
This vehicle is designed to use 91[ (R M)/2 method] (96RON) or higher gasoline for best
performance. If 91[ (R M)/2 method] (96RON) is not available, gasoline from 87 to 90[
(R M)/2 method] (91 to 95RON) can be used temporarily for emergency purposes, but
this will slightly reduce performance. Fuel with gasoline from 87 to 90[ (R M)/2 method]
(91 to 95RON), driving in high temperature or low humidity conditions could cause engine
knocking.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87[ (R M)/2 method] (lower than 91RON) could cause the
emission control system to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and
serious engine damage.
CAUTION
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead
to deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 % ethanol
by volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this
recommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of
any kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.
Ø Never add fuel system additives. Never add cleaning agents other than those
specified by Mazda. Other cleaning agents and additives may damage the system.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 %. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name “Gasohol”.
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not
be covered by the Mazda warranty.
l
Gasohol containing more than 10 % ethanol.
Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
l
l
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page131
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (131,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Emission Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part of
this system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything flammable:
Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with
the engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and
could ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst
inside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will
damage the converter and cause poor performance.
Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Ø Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
Ø Do not coast with the ignition switch turned off.
Ø Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switch turned off.
Ø Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
Ø Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualified technician.
Ø Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before
the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modification
made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
NOTE
While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard from inside and
outside of the cabin interior, however this does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a self-
checking device and it operates while the engine is off.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page132
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (132,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Engine Exhaust (Carbon Monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness
and death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully open
and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss
of consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closed
and the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which
contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or
even death could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,
before starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The
exhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.
Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of
consciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page133
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (133,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Before Starting the Engine
Before Getting In
After Getting In
l
l
l
l
Be sure the windows, outside mirrors,
and outside lights are clean.
Inspect inflation pressures and
condition of tires.
Look under the vehicle for any sign of
fluid leaks.
If you plan to back up, make sure
nothing is in your way.
Are all doors closed and locked?
Is the seat adjusted properly?
Are the inside and outside mirrors
adjusted?
Is the steering wheel adjusted properly?
Is everyone's seat belt fastened?
Check all gauges.
Check all warning lights when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
Release the parking brake and make
sure the brake warning light goes off.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake/clutch fluid,
washer fluid, and other fluid levels should be
inspected. See Maintenance, Section 8.
l
Always be thoroughly familiar with your
Mazda.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page134
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (134,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Break-In Period
Money-Saving Suggestions
No special break-in is necessary, but a few
precautions in the first 1,000 km (600
miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of your Mazda.
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save money on
fuel and repairs.
l
l
Do not race the engine.
Do not maintain one constant speed,
Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine
l
runs smoothly, begin driving.
Avoid fast starts.
Keep the engine tuned. Follow the
l
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle
l
l
have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform inspections and servicing.
or high engine rpm (over 7,000 rpm)
for extended periods of time.
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
l
l
Use the air conditioner only when
l
Avoid full-throttle starts.
necessary.
Slow down on rough roads.
Keep the tires properly inflated.
Do not carry unnecessary weight.
l
l
l
l
Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
For improved engine starting
l
performance the next time you start the
engine after only driving the vehicle a
short distance, turn off the engine after
1 or more of the variable red zone
lamps in the tachometer have turned
off.
In addition, it is recommended that
short trips be avoided to ensure that the
engine reaches operating temperature
before turning off the engine.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Keep windows closed at high speeds.
l
l
l
Slow down when driving in crosswinds
and headwinds.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page135
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (135,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Hazardous Driving
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going
down a hill:
WARNING
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause
damage to the drivetrain. Any loss of
steering or braking control could
cause an accident.
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear while
driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid.
This could lead to loss of vehicle
control and an accident.
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
When driving on ice or in water, snow,
mud, sand, or similar hazards:
l
Be cautious and allow extra distance
for braking.
Avoid sudden braking and sudden
l
maneuvering.
Do not pump the brakes. Continue to
l
press down on the brake pedal.
Refer to Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) on page 5-8.
l
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the rear
wheels.
For more traction in starting on
l
slippery surfaces such as ice or packed
snow, use sand, rock salt, chains,
carpeting, or other nonslip material
under the rear wheels.
NOTE
Use snow chains only on the rear wheels.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page136
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (136,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Floor Mat
Rocking the Vehicle
WARNING
WARNING
Make sure the floor mats are hooked
on the retention pins to prevent them
from bunching up under the foot
pedals:
Do not spin the wheels at more than 56
km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
Using a floor mat that is not secured
is dangerous as it will interfere with
the accelerator and brake pedal
operation, which could result in an
accident.
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning
the wheels at high speed is
dangerous. The spinning tire could
overheat and explode. This could
cause serious injuries.
Do not install two floor mats, one on
top of the other, on the driver's side:
Installing two floor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side is
dangerous as the retention pins can
only keep one floor mat from sliding
forward.
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transmission failure,
and tire damage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the
accelerator slightly and slowly move the
shift lever from 1 (D) to R.
In using a heavy duty floor mat for
winter use always remove the
original floor mat.
Loose floor mat(s) will interfere with
the foot pedal and could result in an
accident.
When setting a floor mat, position the
floor mat so that its eyelets are inserted
over the pointed end of the retention
posts.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page137
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (137,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
qSnow Tires
Winter Driving
Use snow tires on all four wheels
l
Carry emergency gear, including tire
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. Inflate
snow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)
more than recommended on the tire
pressure label (rear door on the driver's
side), but never more than the maximum
cold-tire pressure shown on the tires.
Your vehicle is originally equipped with
summer tires designed for optimum
traction on wet and dry roads. If your
vehicle is to be used on snow and ice
covered roads, Mazda recommends that
you replace the tires originally equipped
on your vehicle with snow tires during the
winter months.
chains, window scraper, flares, a small
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag
of sand or salt.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to
perform the following precautions:
l
Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in
the radiator.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 8-14.
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
Inspect the ignition system for damage
and loose connections.
For improved engine starting
performance the next time you start the
engine after only driving the vehicle a
short distance, turn off the engine after
1 or more of the variable red zone
lamps in the tachometer have turned
off.
In addition, it is recommended that
short trips be avoided to ensure that the
engine reaches operating temperature
before turning off the engine.
l
l
l
WARNING
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
Using tires different in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly affected and result
in an accident.
l
Use washer fluid made with
antifreeze―but do not use engine
coolant antifreeze for washer fluid
(page 8-17).
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
l
Do not use the parking brake in
freezing weather as it may freeze.
Instead, shift to P with an automatic
transmission and to 1 or R with a
manual transmission. Block the rear
wheels.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, the system may
not function correctly when using tires with
steel wire reinforcement in the sidewalls (page
l
Do not apply excessive force to a
window scraper when removing ice or
frozen snow on the mirror glass and
windshield.
l
Never use warm or hot water for
removing snow or ice from windows
and mirrors as it could result in the
glass cracking.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page138
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (138,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Installing the chains
qTire Chains
1. Secure the chains on the rear tires as
tightly as possible. Always follow the
chain manufacturer's instructions.
Check local regulations before using tire
chains.
CAUTION
2. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2
Ø Chains may affect handling.
Ø Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer's
recommended limit, whichever is
lower.
―1 km (1/4―1/2 mile).
Ø Drive carefully and avoid bumps,
holes, and sharp turns.
Ø Avoid locked-wheel braking.
Ø Do not use chains on a temporary
spare tire; it may result in damage
to the vehicle and to the tire. Your
vehicle is not equipped with a
factory installed temporary spare
tire.
Ø Do not use chains on roads that
are free of snow or ice. The tires
and chains could be damaged.
Ø Chains may scratch or chip
aluminum wheels.
NOTE
l
If your vehicle is equipped with the tire
pressure monitoring system, the system may
not function correctly when using tire
chains.
l
Tire chains cannot be installed on vehicle
equipped with 19-inch tires. Before
attempting to install tire chains, the tires on
the front and rear must first be changed
from the 19-inch size to 18-inch tires.
Please consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Install the chains on the rear tires.
Do not use chains on the front tires.
Use only TÜV standard chains, and make
sure they fit.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page139
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (139,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Driving In Flooded Area
Overloading
WARNING
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of your vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of your load by weighing
the items (or people) before putting
them in the vehicle.
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on flooded
roads as it could cause short
circuiting of electrical/electronic
parts, or engine damage or stalling
from water absorption. If the vehicle
has been immersed in water, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page140
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (140,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Driving Tips
Driving on Uneven Road
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving under
the following conditions:
l
Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle
Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle
l
Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance and
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use
care and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page141
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (141,1)
Before Driving Your Mazda
Towing
Trailer Towing
The Mazda RX-8 is not designed for
towing. Never tow a trailer with your
Mazda RX-8.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page142
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (142,1)
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page144
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (144,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qIgnition Switch Positions
Ignition Switch
With advanced
key
Auxiliary key (with advanced key)
NOTE
When starting the engine using the advanced
key, refer to Starting the Engine (page 3-9).
Without advanced
key
When starting the engine with the
auxiliary key, perform the following
procedure.
1. Remove the auxiliary key from the
advanced key (page 3-17).
LOCK
2. Make sure the start knob is in LOCK
position.
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. Only in this position can the
key be removed.
3. Remove the start knob by pulling it
outward while pressing the buttons on
both the left and right sides.
Manual transmission
To turn the key from the ACC to the
LOCK position, push the key in at the
ACC position, then turn it to the LOCK
position.
4. Insert the auxiliary key in the ignition
switch.
Push the key
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page145
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (145,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Automatic transmission
WARNING
Remove the key only when the vehicle
is parked:
To turn the key from the ACC to the
LOCK position, the shift lever must be in
the P position.
Removing the key from the ignition
switch while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. Removing the key allows
the steering wheel to lock. You will
lose steering control and a serious
accident could occur. (For vehicles
equipped with the advanced key, the
steering wheel locks when the starter
knob is turned to the LOCK position.)
Shift lever
engaged in P
(park)
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key or start knob to LOCK
position, set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transmission or in 1 or R
with a manual transmission:
It is important to place the key or
start knob in the LOCK position even
if you are not removing the key from
the ignition or leaving the vehicle.
Leaving the key in other positions
will disable some of the vehicle
security systems and run the battery
down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and shifting the shift lever to P with
an automatic transmission, or to 1 or
R with a manual transmission is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur. This could
cause an accident.
NOTE
If turning the key is difficult, jiggle the steering
wheel from side to side.
Leaving the key or start knob in any position
but LOCK position also disables some of the
security features and may run the battery
down.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page146
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (146,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
ACC (Accessory)
Starting the Engine
The steering wheel unlocks and some
electrical accessories will operate.
NOTE
Engine-starting is controlled by the spark
ignition system.
ON
This system meets all Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Standard requirements
regulating the impulse electrical field strength
of radio noise.
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. Some indicator
lights/warning lights should be inspected
before the engine is started (page 5-40).
NOTE
(Gasoline engine models)
1. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard. This
does not indicate an abnormality.
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. (Manual transmission)
NOTE
Depress the clutch pedal all the way
(With headlight auto-leveling)
When the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, the sound of the headlight leveling
motors operating at the front of the engine
compartment can be heard. This does not
indicate an abnormality.
and shift into neutral.
Keep the clutch pedal depressed while
cranking the engine.
(Automatic transmission)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
START
NOTE
(Manual transmission)
The starter will not operate unless the clutch is
depressed sufficiently.
The engine is started in this position. It
will crank until you release the key. It
then returns to the ON position.
(Automatic transmission)
The starter will not operate if the shift lever is
not in P or N.
qIgnition Key Reminder
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position with the key inserted, a
continuous beep sound will be heard
when the driver's door is opened.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the START
position and hold (up to 10 seconds at
a time) until the engine starts.
CAUTION
Do not try the starter for more than
10 seconds at a time. If the engine
stalls or fails to start, wait 10 seconds
before trying again. Otherwise, you
may damage the starter and drain
the battery.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page147
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (147,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
6. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about 15 seconds. Then perform the
shift operation.
Brake System
qFoot Brake
NOTE
Your Mazda has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
l
In extremely cold weather (below 0°C
(32°F)) or after the vehicle has not been
driven in several days, let the engine warm
up without operating the accelerator.
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
l
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without use of the
accelerator.
l
The display of the variable red zone in the
tachometer changes according to the
temperature of the engine coolant. To
protect the engine, when the engine coolant
temperature is low, the engine does not run
at high speeds. The fuel supply will be cut
at an rpm lower than the red zone.
Refer to Tachometer on page 5-37.
l
If the engine does not start the first time,
refer to Starting a Flooded Engine under
Emergency Starting. If the engine still does
not start, have your vehicle inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-19).
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page148
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (148,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qParking Brake
WARNING
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off, find a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more effort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if you
pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
put the key or start knob to LOCK
position, set the parking brake and
make sure the shift lever is in P with an
automatic transmission or in 1 or R
with a manual transmission:
It is important to place the key or
start knob in the LOCK position even
if you are not removing the key from
the ignition or leaving the vehicle.
Leaving the key in other positions
will disable some of the vehicle
security systems and run the battery
down.
Leaving the driver's seat without
putting the ignition switch in LOCK
position, setting the parking brake
and shifting the shift lever to P with
an automatic transmission, or to 1 or
R with a manual transmission is
dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur. This could
cause an accident.
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
Driving with your foot continuously
on the brake pedal or steadily
applying the brakes for long
distances is dangerous. This causes
overheated brakes, resulting in
longer stopping distances or even
total brake failure. This could cause
loss of vehicle control and a serious
accident. Avoid continuous
application of the brakes.
Dry brakes that have become wet by
driving very slowly and applying the
brakes lightly until brake performance
is normal:
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake on
will cause excessive wear of the brake
linings or pads.
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
NOTE
For parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page149
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (149,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Setting the parking brake
qBrake System Warning Light
Depress the brake pedal and then firmly
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards
with sufficient force to hold the vehicle in
a stationary position.
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning
The light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It turns off
when the parking brake is fully released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the light stays on after the parking brake
is fully released, you may have a brake
problem.
Releasing the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and pull the
parking brake lever upwards, then press
the release button. While holding the
button, lower the parking brake lever all
the way down to the released position.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way.
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
depress or that it may go closer to the
floor. In either case, it will take longer to
stop the vehicle.
1. With the engine stopped, open the
hood and check the brake fluid level
immediately, and then add fluid if
required (page 8-16).
2. After adding fluid, check the light
again.
If the warning light remains on, or if the
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Even if the light turns off have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page150
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (150,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the
brake light is no longer illuminated.
The ABS cannot compensate for
unsafe and reckless driving, excessive
speed, tailgating (following another
vehicle too closely), driving on ice and
snow, and hydroplaning (reduced tire
friction and road contact because of
water on the road surface). You can
still have an accident.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is
NOTE
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
l
Braking distances may be longer on loose
surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)
which usually have a hard foundation. A
vehicle with a normal braking system may
require less distance to stop under these
conditions because the tires will build up a
wedge of surface layer when the wheels
skid.
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
l
qAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The sound of the ABS operating may be
heard when starting the engine or
immediately after starting the vehicle.
However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If one
is about to lock up, the ABS responds by
automatically releasing and reapplying
that wheel's brake.
qABS Warning Light
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal when the ABS operates. Continue
to depress the brake pedal without
pumping the brakes.
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page151
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (151,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated simultaneously is
dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
When the engine is jump-started to charge the
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it
is the result of the weak battery and does not
indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
qBrake Pad Wear Indicator
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may illuminate the brake
system warning light and the ABS
warning light on simultaneously. The
problem is likely to be the electronic
brake force distribution system.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page152
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (152,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
Manual Transmission
Operation
l
The beep sounds to indicate engine
overrev when the tachometer needle
enters the striped zone.
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
The display of the variable red zone in
the tachometer changes according to
the temperature of the engine coolant.
To protect the engine, when the engine
coolant temperature is low, the engine
does not run at high speeds. The fuel
supply will be cut at an rpm lower than
the red zone.
Refer to Tachometer on page 5-37.
q
Manual Transmission Shift Pattern
Neutral position
The shift pattern of the transmission is
conventional, as shown.
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page153
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (153,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Your vehicle is equipped with a device to
prevent shifting to R (reverse) by mistake.
Push the shift lever downward and shift to
R.
CAUTION
Ø Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
except when shifting gears. Also,
do not use the clutch to hold the
vehicle on an upgrade. Riding the
clutch will cause needless clutch
wear and damage.
Ø Do not apply any excessive lateral
force to the gear lever when
changing from 5th to 4th gear.
This could lead to the accidental
selection of 2nd gear, which can
result in damage to the
transmission.
Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to R.
Shifting to R while the vehicle is
still moving may damage the
transmission.
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high
speeds:
NOTE
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
If shifting to R is difficult, shift back into
neutral, release the clutch pedal, and try
again.
qRecommendations for Shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration, we recommend
these shift points.
Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or R
position and set the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle unattended:
Otherwise the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
Gear
Vehicle speed
23 km/h (14 mph)
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
35 km/h (22 mph)
47 km/h (29 mph)
58 km/h (36 mph)
74 km/h (46 mph)
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page154
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (154,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
For cruising
Gear
Vehicle speed
23 km/h (14 mph)
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
5 to 6
34 km/h (21 mph)
45 km/h (28 mph)
56 km/h (35 mph)
68 km/h (42 mph)
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
reduces the chance of stalling and gives
better acceleration when you need more
speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page155
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (155,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Automatic Transmission Controls
Various Lockouts:
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition
switch must be in the ACC or ON position).
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.
NOTE
l
The beep sounds to indicate engine overrev when the tachometer needle enters the striped zone.
The display of the variable red zone in the tachometer changes according to the temperature of the
engine coolant. To protect the engine, when the engine coolant temperature is low, the engine does
not run at high speeds. The fuel supply will be cut at an rpm lower than the red zone.
Refer to Tachometer on page 5-37.
l
l
l
The gear shift-up point may move to the high rpm range temporarily while the engine is warming
up in order to shorten the warming-up period.
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transmission giving
the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transmission to shift gears.
Even if you intend to use the automatic transmission functions as a traditional automatic, you
should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate
gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher
or hear the engine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page156
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (156,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTransmission Ranges
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
The shift lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move
suddenly, causing an accident or
serious injury.
P locks the transmission and prevents the
rear wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the shift lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Only setting the shift lever to the P
position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is
dangerous. If P fails to hold, the
vehicle could move and cause an
accident.
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be
applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
CAUTION
Ø Shifting into P, N or R while the
vehicle is moving can damage
your transmission.
Ø Shifting into a driving gear or
reverse when the engine is running
faster than idle can damage the
transmission.
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause
transmission damage.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the brake
pedal before moving the shift lever from N to
prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete stop
before shifting to or from R, except under
rare circumstances as explained in
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transmission will automatically
shift through a 6-gear sequence.
Temporary use of the direct mode is
possible.
N (Neutral)
Refer to Direct Mode on page 5-19.
In N, the wheels and transmission are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
M (Manual)
M is the manual shift mode position.
Gears can be shifted up or down by
operating the shift lever or steering shift
switches.
Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 5-15).
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page157
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (157,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
l
qActive Adaptive Shift (AAS)
When the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position, the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P.
To be sure the vehicle is in park, the
ignition key cannot be removed unless the
shift lever is in P.
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
automatically controls the transmission
shift points to best suit the road conditions
and driver input. This optimizes engine
performance and improves driving
comfort. When cornering the vehicle,
AAS mode will hold the transmission in
the gear the vehicle was in before entering
the curve, allowing the vehicle to be
accelerated from the same gear after
exiting the curve.
If the driver accelerates rapidly, or
accelerates and decelerates rapidly by
operating the accelerator and brake pedal
for a certain period of time while the
selector lever is in the D position, AAS
mode could activate. When this occurs,
AAS mode will maintain the transmission
in the optimum gear and the driver may
sense that the transmission is not shifting,
however this does not indicate an
abnormality.
l
l
(With Advanced Key)
The ignition switch cannot be turned from
the ACC to the LOCK position when the
shift lever is not in P.
qManual Shift Mode
This mode gives you the feel of driving a
manual transmission vehicle by operating
the shift lever and allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the rear wheels
much like a manual transmission when
more control is desired.
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
NOTE
Changing to manual mode can be done while
driving the vehicle with no damage occurring
to the transmission.
qShift-Lock System
The shift-lock system prevents shifting
out of P unless the brake pedal is
depressed.
To shift from P:
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Move the shift lever.
To return to automatic shift mode, shift
the lever from M to D.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page158
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (158,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
Shifting
l
If you change to manual shift mode when
You can shift gears up and down by
operating the shift lever or the steering
shift switches.
the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift to
M1.
If you change to manual shift mode without
l
NOTE
depressing the accelerator pedal when
driving in D range, 5th gear, the gear will
shift to M4.
l
If the steering shift switches on both sides
(left and right) are operated simultaneously,
the gear will shift once.
l
If you change to manual shift mode without
l
The gear will not shift if:
depressing the accelerator pedal when
driving in D range, 6th gear, the gear will
shift to M5.
l
The steering shift switch and the shift
lever are operated simultaneously.
The UP switch and DOWN switch are
l
Indicators
operated simultaneously.
Shift position indicator
Manually Shifting up
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indicator in the instrument panel
illuminates.
(M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6)
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shift
lever back ( ) once.
Gear position indicator
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
Gear position
indicator
Shift position
indicator
NOTE
If the gears cannot be shifted down when
driving at higher speeds, the gear position
indicator will flash twice to signal that the
gears cannot be shifted down.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page159
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (159,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
To shift up to a higher gear with the
steering shift switches, tap either of the
UP switches toward you once with your
fingers.
Manually Shifting down
( M6 → M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 →
M1)
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shift
lever forward ( ) once.
UP switches
WARNING
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers or thumbs on
the steering shift switches:
To shift down to a lower gear with the
steering shift switches, press either of the
DOWN switches away from you once
with your thumb.
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
DOWN switches
NOTE
l
When driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up depending on vehicle speed.
l
In manual shift mode, gears do not shift up
automatically. Do not run the engine with
the tachometer needle in the RED ZONE. If
the tachometer needle enters the RED
ZONE, you may feel engine-braking
because the fuel delivery will be stopped to
protect the engine. However, this does not
indicate an abnormality.
l
When depressing the accelerator fully, the
transmission will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page160
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (160,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Shifting specification
Shifting up
WARNING
Do not use engine braking on slippery
road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while
driving at high speeds causes sudden
engine braking, which is dangerous.
The sudden change in tire speed
could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
If the vehicle speed is lower than the
speed specified for each gear, the gear
cannot be shifted up to a higher gear.
Gear
Vehicle speed
Between 0 and 18 km/h
(0 and 11 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
M1→M2
Between 20 and 33 km/h
(13 and 21 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
M2→M3
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fingers or thumbs on
the steering shift switches:
Between 30 and 33 km/h
(19 and 21 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
M3→M4
M4→M5
43 km/h (27 mph)
65 km/h (41 mph)
M5→M6
Shifting down
If the vehicle speed is higher than the
speed specified for each gear, the gear
cannot be shifted to a lower gear so as to
protect the transmission.
NOTE
l
When driving at high speeds, the gear may
not shift down depending on vehicle speed.
l
During deceleration, the gear may
Gear
M6→M5
M5→M4
Vehicle speed
210 km/h (130 mph)
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
When depressing the accelerator fully, the
l
175 km/h (108 mph)
transmission will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
Between 122 and 135 km/h
(75 and 83 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
M4→M3
Second gear fixed mode
Between 77 and 90 km/h
(47 and 59 mph), depending on how
much the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
When the shift lever is tapped back (
while the vehicle is stopped, the
transmission is set in the second gear
fixed mode. The gear is fixed in second
while in this mode for easier starting and
driving on slippery roads. If the shift lever
is tapped back ( ) or forward ( ) while
in the second gear fixed mode, the mode
will be canceled.
)
M3→M2
M2→M1
30 km/h (18 mph)
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page161
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (161,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
During deceleration, the gears shift down
automatically when speed is reduced to
the following:
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or on a steep upgrade, downshift
before the engine starts to overwork. This
gives better acceleration when you need
more speed.
Gear
M6→M5
Vehicle speed
60 km/h (37 mph)
M5→M4
M4→M3
M3→M2
M2→M1
40 km/h (24 mph)
26 km/h (16 mph)
18 km/h (11 mph)
15 km/h (9 mph)
On a steep downgrade, downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
NOTE
The gear does not shift down to M1
automatically while in the second gear fixed
mode.
qDirect Mode
Direct mode can be used for temporarily
switching gears by operating the steering
shift switch while the vehicle is being
driven with the selector lever in the D
range.
If the vehicle is kicked down at the
following speeds or lower, the gears shift
down automatically:
While in direct mode, the D and M
indicator lights illuminate and the gear
position in use is illuminated.
Gear
M6→M5
Vehicle speed
210 km/h (130 mph)
175 km/h (108 mph)
175 km/h (108 mph)
M6→M4
Direct mode is canceled (released) under
the following conditions.
M5→M4
l
The vehicle is driven at a constant
Recommendations for shifting
Upshifting
speed.
l
The needle in the tachometer
For normal acceleration and cruising, we
recommend these shift points.
approaches the red zone.
The vehicle is driven at a constant
l
speed and the accelerator pedal is
heavily depressed.
Gear
M1 to M2
Vehicle speed
19 km/h (12 mph)
M2 to M3
M3 to M4
M4 to M5
M5 to M6
35 km/h (22 mph)
47 km/h (29 mph)
58 km/h (36 mph)
78 km/h (49 mph)
For cruising
Gear
M1 to M2
M2 to M3
M3 to M4
M4 to M5
M5 to M6
Vehicle speed
5 km/h (3 mph)
30 km/h (19 mph)
40 km/h (25 mph)
50 km/h (31 mph)
67 km/h (42 mph)
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page162
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (162,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a
slow speed.
qDriving Tips
WARNING
Do not allow the vehicle to move in
reverse on an up-slope while the
selector lever is in a forward gear
position, or move forward on a down-
slope while the selector lever is in the
reverse position.
Otherwise, the engine will stop,
causing the loss of the power brake
and power steering functions, and
make it difficult to control the vehicle
which could result in an accident.
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transmission will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
Direct mode indicator
Gear position indicator
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
NOTE
Shifting up and down while in direct mode may
not be possible depending on the vehicle
speed. In addition, because direct mode is
canceled (released) depending on the rate of
acceleration or if the accelerator is fully
depressed, use of the manual shift mode is
recommended if you need to drive the vehicle
in a particular gear for long periods.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release the brake pedal while
gradually accelerating.
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight
and grade steepness. Descend slowly,
using the brakes only occasionally to
prevent them from overheating.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page163
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (163,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
l
Power Steering
The power steering system is inoperable
when the power steering malfunction
indicator light illuminates. Steering is
possible, but requires more physical effort.
Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left
and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the
power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel
heavy, but this does not indicate a
Power steering is only operable when the
engine is running. If the engine is off or if
the power steering system is inoperable,
you can still steer, but it requires more
physical effort.
l
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
malfunction. If this occurs, park the vehicle
safely and wait a few minutes for the system
to return to normal.
qPower Steering Malfunction
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, and turns off when the engine is
started.
If the light remains illuminated after the
engine is started, or illuminates while
driving, turn off the engine after parking
in a safe place, and then start the engine
again.
If the light does not illuminate after
restarting the engine, this indicates that
the power steering is restored and normal
steering is possible.
If the light remains illuminated, the power
steering is still inoperable. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page164
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (164,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qActivation/Deactivation
Cruise Control
To activate the system, press the ON/OFF
switch.
The cruise main indicator light
illuminates.
With cruise control, you can set and
automatically maintain any speed of more
than about 30 km/h (19 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the
following conditions:
To deactivate the system, press the switch
again.
The cruise main indicator light turns off.
Using the cruise control under the
following conditions is dangerous
and could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Ø Hilly terrain
Ø Steep inclines
Ø Heavy or unsteady traffic
Ø Slippery or winding roads
Ø Similar restrictions that require
inconsistent speed
qCruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)
WARNING
Keep the ON/OFF switch off when
cruise control is not in use:
Leaving the ON/OFF switch on when
not using the cruise control is
dangerous as you may hit one of the
other buttons and put the vehicle in
cruise control unexpectedly. This
could result in loss of vehicle control.
The indicator light has two colors.
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
qTo Set Speed
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and
the cruise control system is activated.
1. Activate the cruise control system by
pressing the ON/OFF switch.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 30 km/h (19 mph).
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page165
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (165,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
3. Press down the cruise control SET/-
switch and release it at the speed you
want. Release the accelerator
simultaneously.
qTo Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press up the cruise control RES/+ switch
and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
Cruise
control
switch
Cruise
control
switch
Do not continue to hold the switch. Until
you release it, speed will continue to drop
(unless you continue to accelerate) and
you'll miss the desired speed.
NOTE
Your vehicle has a tap-up feature that
allows you to increase your current speed
in increments of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a
momentary tap of the cruise control RES/
+ switch. Multiple taps will increase your
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each
tap.
l
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while ascending,
or speed up while descending.
l
Cruise control will turn off if vehicle speed
drops below 30 km/h (19 mph) when cruise
is activated, such as when climbing a steep
grade.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page166
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (166,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Your vehicle has a tap-down feature that
allows you to decrease your current speed
in decrements of 1.6 km/h (1 mph) by a
momentary tap of the cruise control SET/-
switch. Multiple taps will decrease your
vehicle speed 1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each
tap.
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed.
Press down the cruise control SET/-
switch and release it immediately.
qTo Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 30 km/h (19 mph)
Cruise
control
switch
If some other method besides the ON/
OFF switch was used to cancel cruising
speed (such as applying the brake pedal)
and the system is still activated, the most
recent set speed will automatically resume
when the cruise control RES/+ switch is
pressed up.
If vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (19
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 30
km/h (19 mph) or more and press up the
cruise control RES/+ switch.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on. Greater speed
will not interfere with or change the set speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator to return to
the set speed.
Cruise
control
switch
qTo Decrease Cruising Speed
Press down the cruise control SET/-
switch and hold it. The vehicle will
gradually slow.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
qTo Cancel
Cruise
control
switch
To cancel the system, use one of these
methods:
l
Press the ON/OFF switch.
Slightly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
l
l
transmission only).
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page167
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (167,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
Press the CANCEL switch.
Traction Control System
(TCS)í
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by
controlling engine torque and braking.
When the TCS detects driving wheel
slippage, it lowers engine torque and
operates the brakes to prevent loss of
traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels
without causing them to spin and lose
traction.
The system turns off when the ignition is
switched off.
NOTE
Cruise control will cancel at about 15 km/h (9
mph) below the preset speed (such as may
happen when climbing a long, steep grade).
WARNING
Do not rely on the traction control
system as a substitute for safe driving:
The traction control system (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive
at reduced speeds when roads are
covered with ice and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction
devices on snow and/or ice-covered
roads is dangerous. The traction
control system (TCS) alone cannot
provide adequate traction and you
could still have an accident.
NOTE
To turn off the TCS, press the DSC OFF switch
(page 5-28).
íSome models.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page168
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (168,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC)í
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip
when driving on slippery surfaces, or
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,
enhancing vehicle safety.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not rely on the dynamic stability
control as a substitute for safe driving:
The dynamic stability control (DSC)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road
contact because of water on the road
surface). You can still have an
accident.
NOTE
l
In addition to the indicator light flashing, a
slight lugging sound will come from the
engine. This indicates that the TCS is
operating properly.
l
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, it
will be impossible to achieve high rpm
when the TCS is on.
5-26
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page169
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (169,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qDSC OFF Indicator Light
CAUTION
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly
unless the following are observed:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Use tires of the correct size
specified for your Mazda on all
four wheels.
Use tires of the same
manufacturer, brand and tread
pattern on all four wheels.
Do not mix worn tires.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Ø The DSC may not operate correctly
when tire chains are used or a
temporary spare tire is installed
because the tire diameter changes.
Ø If repair or replacement of the
steering or other surrounding
equipment is necessary, have it
done at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. If the center position of the
steering deviates, the DSC may not
operate correctly because there is
a sensor in the steering which
detects driving conditions.
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is
switched off (page 5-28).
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is
not switched off, take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic
stability control may have a malfunction.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is
replaced, the DSC will be inoperable. In this
case, the DSC OFF indicator light flashes and
the TCS/DSC indicator light illuminates.
To make the DSC operable, do the following
procedure with the battery connected.
qTCS/DSC Indicator Light
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn
it counterclockwise fully.
3. Make sure the DSC OFF indicator turn off.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, then turn it to the ON position
again.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
5. Make sure the TCS/DSC indicator light
turns off.
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the DSC
OFF indicator light remain illuminated even
after turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page170
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (170,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
l
qDSC OFF Switch
When DSC is on and you attempt to free the
vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out of
freshly fallen snow, the TCS (part of the
DSC system) will activate. Depressing the
accelerator will not increase engine power
and freeing the vehicle may be difficult.
When this happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.
If the TCS/DSC is off when the engine is
turned off, it automatically activates when
the ignition switch is turned on.
Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide the
best stability. When the TCS/DSC is off, the
TCS/DSC does not activate but the brake
LSD (Limited Slip Differentials) function
remains.
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the
TCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator light
will illuminate.
l
l
l
If the DSC OFF switch is pressed and held
for a second or more, the TCS/DSC system
may become inoperative due to the system
detecting switch trouble. If the TCS/DSC
system becomes inoperative, the TCS/DSC
and the DSC OFF indicator lights
Press the switch again to turn the TCS/
DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicator
light will go out.
illuminate simultaneously. In this case, turn
off the engine and restart it to restore the
TCS/DSC.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page171
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (171,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí
The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) monitors the pressure for each tire.
If tire pressure is too low in one or more tires, the system will inform the driver via the
warning light in the instrument panel and by the warning beep sound.
The tire pressure sensors installed on each wheel send tire pressure data by radio signal to
the receiver unit in the vehicle.
Tire pressure sensors
NOTE
When the ambient temperature is low due to seasonal changes, tire temperatures are also lower.
When the tire temperature decreases, the air pressure decreases as well. The TPMS warning light
may illuminate more frequently. Visually inspect the tires daily before driving, and check tire
pressures monthly with a tire pressure gauge. When checking tire pressures, use of a digital tire
pressure gauge is recommended.
TPMS does not alleviate your need to check the pressure and condition of all four tires
regularly.
íSome models.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page172
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (172,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
CAUTION
Ø Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it
is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-
inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Ø Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Ø To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a
problem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or
blow out.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page173
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (173,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
WARNING
Warning Light
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is
too low in one or more tires, and flashes
when there is a system malfunction.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page174
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (174,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure. Refer to the specification charts
(page 10-6).
NOTE
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
CAUTION
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may
require some time for the TPMS warning
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.
Tires lose air naturally over time and the
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too
soft over time or you have a flat. However,
when you find one low tire in a set of four-
that is an indication of trouble; you should
have someone drive the vehicle slowly
forward so you can inspect any low tire for
cuts and any metal objects sticking through
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles
l
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be
addressed by more than simply refilling the
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems
and order the best replacement tire for your
vehicle.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page175
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (175,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
l
If the warning light illuminates again even
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there
may be a tire puncture.
When a metallic device such as a non-
genuine navigation system is equipped
near the center of the dashboard, which
may block radio signals from the tire
pressure sensor to the receiver unit.
When using the following devices in
the vehicle that may cause radio
Vehicles with Instant Mobility System
(IMS) emergency flat tire repair kit
l
If an emergency tire repair is needed,
repair the punctured tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit (page 7-5).
interference with the receiver unit.
l
A digital device such as a personal
computer.
A current converter device such as a
l
CAUTION
Do not use non-genuine tire sealant.
It may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
DC-AC converter.
l
When excess snow or ice adheres to
the vehicle, especially around the
wheels.
l
l
l
l
When the tire pressure sensor batteries
are exhausted.
Vehicles with optional temporary spare
tire
When using a wheel with no tire
pressure sensor installed.
When using tires with steel wire
reinforcement in the side walls.
When using tire chains.
If you have bought the optional temporary
spare tire, replace the punctured tire with
the temporary spare tire. Refer to the
manufacturer's instructions.
NOTE
qTires and Wheels
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used.
CAUTION
When inspecting or adjusting the tire
air pressures, do not apply excessive
force to the stem part of the wheel
unit. The stem part could be
damaged.
Warning light flashes
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Changing tires and wheels
qSystem Error Activation
The following procedure allows the
TPMS to recognize a tire pressure sensor's
unique ID signal code whenever tires or
wheels are changed, such as changing to
and from winter tires.
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A system error activation may occur in
the following cases:
l
When there is equipment or a device
near the vehicle using the same radio
frequency as that of the tire pressure
sensors.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page176
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (176,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Starting and Driving
NOTE
Replacing tires and wheels
Each tire pressure sensor has a unique ID
signal code. The signal code must be
registered with the TPMS before it can work.
The easiest way to do it is to have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer change your tire and
complete ID signal code registration.
CAUTION
Ø When replacing/repairing the tires
or wheels or both, have the work
done by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer, or the tire pressure sensors
may be damaged.
Ø The wheels equipped on your
Mazda are specially designed for
installation of the tire pressure
sensors. Do not use non-genuine
wheels, otherwise it may not be
possible to install the tire pressure
sensors.
When having tires changed at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer
Tire pressure sensor ID signal code
registration is completed when an
Authorized Mazda Dealer changes your
vehicle's tires.
When changing tires yourself
Be sure to have the tire pressure sensors
installed whenever tires or wheels are
replaced.
When having a tire or wheel or both
replaced, the following types of tire
pressure sensor installations are possible.
If you or someone else changes tires, you
or someone else can also undertake the
steps for the TPMS to complete the ID
signal code registration.
1. After tires have been changed, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position, then
turn it back to the ACC or LOCK
position.
l
l
l
The tire pressure sensor is removed
from the old wheel and installed to the
new one.
The same tire pressure sensor is used
with the same wheel. Only the tire is
replaced.
2. Wait for about 15 minutes.
3. After about 15 minutes, drive the
vehicle at a speed of at least 25 km/h
(16 mph) for 10 minutes and the tire
pressure sensor ID signal code will be
registered automatically.
A new tire pressure sensor is installed
to a new wheel.
NOTE
l
The tire pressure sensor ID signal code
NOTE
must be registered when a new tire pressure
sensor is purchased. For purchase of a tire
pressure sensor and registration of the tire
pressure sensor ID signal code, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When reinstalling a previously removed tire
pressure sensor to a wheel, replace the
grommet (seal between valve body/sensor
and wheel) for the tire pressure sensor.
If the vehicle is driven within about 15 minutes
of changing tires, the tire pressure monitoring
system warning light will flash because the
sensor ID signal code would not have been
registered. If this happens, park the vehicle for
about 15 minutes, after which the sensor ID
signal code will register upon driving the
vehicle for 10 minutes.
l
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page177
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (177,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
Meters and Gauges
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the dashboard gauges illuminate.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page178
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (178,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
qSpeedometer
qOdometer, Trip Meter and Trip
Meter Selector
The speedometer indicates the speed of
the vehicle.
The display mode can be changed
between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the selector while one of them is
displayed. The selected mode will be
displayed.
qSpeed Unit Selector
In some countries, you may have to
change the speed units between km/h and
mph.
Trip meter selector
Press the speed unit selector for 2 second
or more.
The speed units for the speedometer will
change between km/h and mph.
Trip meter
Speed unit selector
Odometer
Speedometer
Trip meter A
NOTE
Odometer and trip meter distance units will
change between kilometers and miles in
accordance with the speed unit.
Odometer
Press the selector
Trip meter B
Odometer
Press the selector
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page179
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (179,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
NOTE
NOTE
l
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
LOCK position, the odometer or trip meters
cannot be displayed, however, pressing the
selector button can inadvertently switch the
trip meters or reset them during an
approximate ten-minute period in the following
cases:
Only the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
l
The trip record will be erased when:
l
The power supply is interrupted (blown
fuse or the battery is disconnected).
The vehicle is driven over 999.9 km
l
(mile).
l
After the ignition switch is turned to the
ACC or LOCK position from the ON
position.
After the driver's door is opened.
qTachometer
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
l
Odometer
Automatic transmission
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Striped zone
Variable red zones
Trip meter
Red zone
The trip meter can record the total
distance of two trips. One is recorded in
trip meter A, and the other is recorded in
trip meter B.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and trip
meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is filled.
Manual transmission
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
Striped zone
Variable red zones
Red zone
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter is
again reset. Return it to “0.0” by holding
the selector depressed for 1 second or
more. Use this meter to measure trip
distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page180
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (180,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
qFuel Gauge
CAUTION
The fuel gauge shows approximately how
much fuel is remaining in the tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
We recommend keeping the tank over 1/4
full. When the low fuel warning light
illuminates or when the needle is near E,
refuel as soon as possible.
Do not run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
NOTE
l
The beep sounds to indicate engine overrev
when the tachometer needle enters the
striped zone.
l
The display of the variable red zone in the
tachometer changes according to the
temperature of the engine coolant. To
protect the engine, when the engine coolant
temperature is low, the engine does not run
at high speeds. The fuel supply will be cut
at an rpm lower than the red zone.
Low fuel warning light
q
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The engine coolant temperature gauge
shows the temperature of the engine
coolant.
NOTE
l
After refueling, it may require some time for
the needle to stabilize. In addition, the
needle may deviate while driving on a slope
or curve since the fuel moves in the tank.
l
The direction of the arrow (
) shows that
the fuel-filler lid is on the left side of the
vehicle.
qDashboard Illumination
Rotate the thumb wheel to adjust the
brightness of the instrument cluster and
other illuminations in the dashboard.
NOTE
If the needle is near H, it indicates
overheating.
l
The brightness of dashboard illuminations
(except instrument cluster) can be adjusted
when the headlight switch is in the
position.
The brightness of the instrument cluster
illumination can be adjusted when the
headlight switch is in any position.
or
CAUTION
Driving with an overheated engine
can cause serious engine damage
(page 7-17).
l
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page181
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (181,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Instrument Cluster and Indicators
Bright
Dim
Canceling the illumination dimmer
When the headlight switch is in the
or
position, the illumination of the
instrument cluster and the information
display dims.
When driving on snowy or foggy roads,
or in other situations when the instrument
cluster or information display's visibility
is reduced due to glare from surrounding
brightness, cancel the illumination
dimmer and increase the illumination
intensity.
To cancel the illumination dimmer, rotate
the thumb wheel upward fully. You may
hear a click sound and the illumination
dimmer will be canceled.
NOTE
l
This symbol ( ) indicates the thumb wheel
to adjust the brightness of the dashboard
illumination.
l
If the dashboard illumination switch is kept
at the illumination dimmer cancel position,
the instrument cluster and the information
display will not dim when the headlight
switch is turned to the
again.
or
position
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page182
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (182,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Warning/Indicator Lights
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Brake System Warning Light
Page
Charging System Warning Light
Engine Oil Level Warning Light
Engine Coolant Level Warning Light
Check Engine Light
ABS Warning Light
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page183
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (183,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Page
Low Fuel Warning Light
Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep
Door-Ajar Warning Light
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light
Automatic Transmission Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
KEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY Indicator Light (Green)
Security Indicator Light
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light
Shift Position Indicator Light
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
DSC OFF Indicator Light
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
Lights-On Indicator Light
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light
Headlight Auto-Leveling Malfunction Indicator Light
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page184
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (184,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Signal
Warning/Indicator Lights
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights
Page
If the warning light remains on, or if the
brakes do not operate properly, do not
drive the vehicle. Have it towed to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qBrake System Warning Light
Even if the light turns off have your brake
system inspected as soon as possible by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
This warning has the following functions:
Having to add brake fluid is sometimes an
indicator of leakage. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible even if the
brake light is no longer illuminated.
Parking brake warning
The light illuminates when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the START or ON position. It turns off
when the parking brake is fully released.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system
warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system
Low brake fluid level warning
If the light stays on after the parking brake
is fully released, you may have a brake
problem.
warning light illuminated is
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way.
dangerous. It indicates that your
brakes may not work at all or that
they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains
illuminated, after checking that the
parking brake is fully released, have
the brakes inspected immediately.
You may notice that the pedal is harder to
depress or that it may go closer to the
floor. In either case, it will take longer to
stop the vehicle.
1. With the engine stopped, open the
hood and check the brake fluid level
immediately, and then add fluid if
required (page 8-16).
2. After adding fluid, check the light
again.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page185
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (185,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qABS Warning Light
qElectronic Brake Force
Distribution System Warning
The warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
If the electronic brake force distribution
control unit determines that some
components are operating incorrectly, the
control unit may illuminate the brake
system warning light and the ABS
warning light on simultaneously. The
problem is likely to be the electronic
brake force distribution system.
If the ABS warning light stays on while
you're driving, the ABS control unit has
detected a system malfunction. If this
occurs, your brakes will function normally
as if the vehicle had no ABS.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning
light and brake warning light
illuminated. Have the vehicle towed to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have
the brakes inspected as soon as
possible:
NOTE
When the engine is jump-started to charge the
battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it
is the result of the weak battery and does not
indicate an ABS malfunction.
Driving when the brake system
warning light and ABS warning light
are illuminated simultaneously is
dangerous.
Recharge the battery.
When both lights are illuminated, the
rear wheels could lock more quickly
in an emergency stop than under
normal circumstances.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page186
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (186,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qCharging System Warning Light
When the engine oil level is low, the warning
beep is also heard while the engine oil level
warning light is flashing.
Refer to Engine Oil Level Warning Beep on
page 5-56.
If the light flashes and then illuminates
If the light illuminates while driving:
This warning light illuminates when the
switch is turned and turns off when the
engine is started.
1. Drive to the side of the road and park
off the right-of-way.
2. Turn off the engine and inspect the
add oil.
If the warning light illuminates while
driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off
the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
3. Check the light.
If the engine oil level warning light is
illuminated and you are unable to
immediately add engine oil, do not drive
at high speed, keep the engine speed low
and get to a location where oil can be
added as soon as possible. We recommend
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the
charging system warning light is
illuminated because the engine could
stop unexpectedly.
If the light remains illuminated even after
you add oil, have your vehicle checked at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qEngine Oil Level Warning Light
CAUTION
Don't run the engine if the oil level is
low. It could result in extensive
engine damage.
This warning light indicates a low engine
oil level while the engine is running by
briefly flashing the light and then fully
illuminating it.
If there is a problem with the system, the
light flashes continuously.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page187
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (187,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
If the light illuminates while driving:
The Mazda RX-8 requires regular checking of
the engine oil level. The compact, high
performance RENESIS rotary engine in your
vehicle consumes a small amount of engine oil
due to its structural design. An oil pump
optimizes the amount of oil injected to
1. Drive to the side of the road and park
off the right-of-way.
2. Turn off the engine and inspect the
low, add engine coolant.
lubricate the rotor seals in the combustion
cycle. Although your vehicle is equipped with
an engine oil level warning light, it is best to
keep the engine oil level in the range between
full and low by checking the oil dipstick
regularly. Mazda recommends checking the oil
level at every second fuel filling. The oil
consumption of the engine depends on engine
speed and engine load. Under extreme driving
conditions, oil consumption can be higher.
3. Check the light.
If the light remains illuminated even after
you add engine coolant, have your vehicle
towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Don't run the engine if the engine
coolant level is low. It could result in
extensive engine damage.
If the light flashes continuously
qCheck Engine Light
If the warning light continues to flash, do
not drive at high speeds, drive the vehicle
at low engine rpm, and have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the
system.
NOTE
If the engine is turned off while the oil level
indicator is flashing due to a system
malfunction, it may take a few minutes until the
indicator starts flashing again after the engine
is started.
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and turns off when the engine is
started.
q
Engine Coolant Level Warning Light
If this light illuminates while driving, the
vehicle may have a problem. It is
important to note the driving conditions
when the light illuminated and consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The check engine light may illuminate in
the following cases:
l
The fuel tank level being very low or
approaching empty.
The engine's electrical system has a
This warning light indicates low engine
coolant level.
l
problem.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page188
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (188,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
l
The emission control system has a
WARNING
problem.
The fuel-filler cap is missing or not
tightened securely.
l
Never tamper with the air bag/
pretensioner systems and always have
an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
all servicing and repairs:
If the check engine light remains on or
flashes continuously, do not drive at high
speeds and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
Self-servicing or tampering with the
systems is dangerous. An air bag/
pretensioner could accidentally
activate or become disabled causing
serious injury or death.
q
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Light
qLow Fuel Warning Light
Low fuel warning light
If the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner
system is working properly, the warning
light illuminates when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position or after the
engine is cranked. The warning light turns
off after a specified period of time.
This warning light in the fuel gauge
signals that the fuel tank will soon be
empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
qSeat Belt Warning Light/Beep
A system malfunction is indicated if the
warning light constantly flashes,
constantly illuminates or does not
illuminate at all when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position. If any of
these occur, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible. The system
may not work in an accident.
The seat belt warning light illuminates
and a beep sound will be heard if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page189
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (189,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Conditions of operation
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
Condition
Result
The driver's seat belt is not The warning light
fastened when the ignition flashes and a beep
switch is turned to the ON sound will be heard
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
Driver seated/Front passenger seated
The seat belt warning function reminds
the front passenger to fasten the seat belt
according to the chart below.
position.
for about 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is
fastened while the warning
light and the beep sound are
activated.
The warning light
turns off and the beep
sound stops.
Vehicle speed
The driver's seat belt is
The warning light will
fastened before the ignition not illuminate and the
switch is turned to the ON beep sound will not be
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
position.
heard.
Seat belt
(Driver)
Belt minder
NOTE
The belt minder can be deactivated. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or
restore the seat belt minder.
Seat belt
(Passenger)
Indicator
Beep
Driver seated/Front passenger not
seated
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
The belt minder is a supplemental
warning to the seat belt warning function.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, the warning light/beep
operates to give you further reminders
according to the chart below.
Placing heavy items on the front
passenger seat may cause the front
passenger seat belt warning function to
operate depending on the weight of the
item.
Vehicle speed
Between 0 ― 20
km/h
(0 ― 12 mph)
20 km/h
(12 mph) or
more
Condition
Once the beep sound is heard, it continues
sounding even if the vehicle speed lowers
to 20 km/h (12 mph) or less until the
seatbelt is fastened or the beep sound
period has passed.
Seat belt
Indicator
Beep
: Fastened
: Unfastened
: Illuminated
: Flashing
: Beep
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page190
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (190,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qAutomatic Transmission Warning
l
To allow the front passenger seat weight
Light
sensor to function properly, do not place
and sit on an additional seat cushion on the
front passenger seat. The sensor may not
function properly because the additional
seat cushion could cause sensor
interference.
l
When a small child sits on the front
passenger seat, it is possible that neither
the warning light nor the warning beep
operate.
This warning light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
The light illuminates when the
transmission has a problem.
qDoor-Ajar Warning Light
CAUTION
If the automatic transmission
warning light illuminates, the
transmission has an electrical
problem. Continuing to drive your
Mazda in this condition could cause
damage to your transmission.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible.
This warning light illuminates when any
door or the trunk is not securely closed.
Close the door or the trunk securely
before driving the vehicle.
qTire Pressure Monitoring System
qLow Washer Fluid Level
Warning Lightí
Warning Lightí
This warning light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
This warning light indicates that little
washer fluid remains. Add fluid (page
Thereafter, the warning light illuminates
and a beep is heard when tire pressure is
too low in one or more tires, and flashes
when there is a system malfunction.
5-48
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page191
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (191,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tire
pressure. Refer to the specification charts
(page 10-6).
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes, or
the tire pressure warning beep sound is
heard, decrease vehicle speed
CAUTION
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
immediately and avoid sudden
maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or flashes,
or the tire pressure warning beep
sound is heard, it is dangerous to
drive the vehicle at high speeds, or
perform sudden maneuvering or
braking. Vehicle drivability could
worsen and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak
or a flat, pull over to a safe position
where you can check the visual
condition of the tire and determine if
you have enough air to proceed to a
place where air may be added and
the system monitored again by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire
repair station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken
care of as soon as possible before it
develops into a more serious
situation that could lead to tire
failure and a dangerous accident.
Warning light illuminates/Warning
beep sounds
When the warning light illuminates, and
the warning beep sound is heard (about 3
seconds), tire pressure is too low in one or
more tires.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page192
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (192,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
If the warning light illuminates again even
after the tire pressures are adjusted, there
may be a tire puncture.
l
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the
tires are cold. Tire pressure will vary
according to the tire temperature, therefore
let the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive
it 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjusting
the tire pressures. When pressure is
adjusted on hot tires to the cold inflation
pressure, the TPMS warning light/beep may
turn on after the tires cool and pressure
drops below specification.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature, may turn
off if the ambient temperature rises. In this
case, it will also be necessary to adjust the
tire air pressures. If the TPMS warning
light illuminates due to a drop in tire air
pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
Vehicles with Instant Mobility System
(IMS) emergency flat tire repair kit
If an emergency tire repair is needed,
repair the punctured tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit (page 7-5).
CAUTION
Do not use non-genuine tire sealant.
It may damage the tire pressure
sensor.
Vehicles with optional temporary spare
tire
If you have bought the optional temporary
spare tire, replace the punctured tire with
the temporary spare tire. Refer to the
manufacturer's instructions.
l
After adjusting the tire air pressures, it may
require some time for the TPMS warning
light to turn off. If the TPMS warning light
remains illuminated, drive the vehicle at a
speed of at least 25 km/h (16 mph) for 10
minutes, and then verify that it turns off.
Tires lose air naturally over time and the
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too
soft over time or you have a flat. However,
when you find one low tire in a set of four-
that is an indication of trouble; you should
have someone drive the vehicle slowly
forward so you can inspect any low tire for
cuts and any metal objects sticking through
tread or sidewall. Put a few drops of water
in the valve stem to see if it bubbles
NOTE
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used.
l
Warning light flashes
When the warning light flashes, there may
be a system malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
indicating a bad valve. Leaks need to be
addressed by more than simply refilling the
trouble tire as leaks are dangerous - take it
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer which has
all the equipment to fix tires, TPMS systems
and order the best replacement tire for your
vehicle.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page193
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (193,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
When flashing
qKEY Warning Light (Red)/KEY
Indicator Light (Green) (with
Advanced Key)
l
Under the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) flashes to
inform the driver that the start knob
will not rotate to the ACC position
even if it is pushed in from the LOCK
position.
l
The advanced key battery is dead.
The advanced key is not within
l
operational range.
The advanced key is placed in areas
l
This indicator has two colors.
KEY Warning Light (Red)
When illuminated
where it is difficult for the system to
detect the signal (page 3-7).
A key from another manufacturer
similar to the advanced key is in the
operational range.
l
l
When the ignition switch is turned to
l
the ON position, it illuminates
momentarily and then goes out.
If any malfunction occurs in the
Under the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) will flash
continuously when the start knob has
not been returned to the LOCK
position to notify the driver that the
advanced key has been removed from
the vehicle. It will stop flashing when
the advanced key is back inside the
vehicle.
l
advanced keyless system, it illuminates
continuously.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the KEY
warning light illuminated:
l
The start knob has not been returned
If the KEY warning light remains
illuminated, do not continue to drive
using the advanced key system. Park
the vehicle in a safe place and use
the auxiliary key to continue driving
the vehicle. Have the vehicle
to the LOCK position, the driver's
door is open, and the advanced key
is removed from the vehicle.
l
The start knob has not been returned
to the LOCK position and all the
doors are closed after removing the
advanced key from the vehicle.
inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
The flashing KEY warning light (red) and the
beep sound operate simultaneously (page
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page194
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (194,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
KEY Indicator Light (Green)
When illuminated
The light stops flashing when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position with
the correct ignition key.
When the start knob is pushed in from the
LOCK position, the system confirms that
the correct advanced key is inside the
vehicle, the KEY indicator light (green)
illuminates, and the start knob can be
turned to the ACC position (page 3-9).
At this time, the immobilizer system is
disarmed and the light illuminates for
about 3 seconds and then turns off.
If the engine does not start with the
correct ignition key, and the security
indicator light keeps illuminating or
flashing, the system may have a
malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
When flashing
When the advanced key battery power is
low, the KEY indicator light flashes for 30
seconds after the start knob is turned from
the ON position to the ACC or LOCK
position. Replace with a new battery
before the advanced key becomes
unusable (page 3-6).
qHeadlight High-Beam Indicator
Light
NOTE
The advanced key can be set so that the KEY
indicator light (green) does not flash even if
the battery power is low.
Refer to Setting Change (Function
Customization)(page 3-20).
This light indicates one of two things:
l
The high-beam headlights are on.
qSecurity Indicator Light
l
The turn signal lever is in the flash-to-
pass position.
This indicator light starts flashing every 2
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
from the ON to the ACC position and the
immobilizer system is armed.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page195
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (195,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qShift Position Indicator Light
qTCS/DSC Indicator Lightí
(Automatic Transmission)
This indicates the selected shift position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position. If the TCS or DSC is
operating, the indicator light flashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS or DSC may
have a malfunction and they may not
operate correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qDSC OFF Indicator Lightí
Gear position indicator
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is
switched off (page 5-28).
Gear position indicator
The gear position indicator displays the
gear in use while in either manual shift or
direct mode.
If the light stays on when the TCS/DSC is
not switched off, take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer. The dynamic
stability control may have a malfunction.
íSome models.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page196
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (196,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
If the battery is disconnected or a fuse is
replaced, the DSC will be inoperable. In this
case, the DSC OFF indicator light flashes and
the TCS/DSC indicator light illuminates.
To make the DSC operable, do the following
procedure with the battery connected.
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
qLights-On Indicator Light
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the steering clockwise fully, then turn
it counterclockwise fully.
3. Make sure the DSC OFF indicator turn off.
This indicator light illuminates when the
exterior lights and dashboard illumination
are on.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position, then turn it to the ON position
again.
5. Make sure the TCS/DSC indicator light
turns off.
qPower Steering Malfunction
Indicator Light
If the TCS/DSC indicator light and the DSC
OFF indicator light remain illuminated even
after turning the ignition switch to the ON
position, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
qCruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)
This indicator light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, and turns off when the engine is
started.
If the light remains illuminated after the
engine is started, or illuminates while
driving, turn off the engine after parking
in a safe place, and then start the engine
again.
If the light does not illuminate after
restarting the engine, this indicates that
the power steering is restored and normal
steering is possible.
The indicator light has two colors.
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the ON/OFF switch is pressed and
the cruise control system is activated.
If the light remains illuminated, the power
steering is still inoperable. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page197
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (197,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
NOTE
qTurn-Signal/Hazard Warning
l
The power steering system is inoperable
when the power steering malfunction
Indicator Lights
indicator light illuminates. Steering is
possible, but requires more physical effort.
Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left
and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the
power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel
heavy, but this does not indicate a
l
When operating the turn signal lights, the
left or right turn signal indicator light
flashes to indicate which turn signal light
is operating (page 5-60).
malfunction. If this occurs, park the vehicle
safely and wait a few minutes for the system
to return to normal.
When operating the hazard warning
lights, both turn signal indicator lights
flash (page 5-67).
qHeadlight Auto-Leveling
Malfunction Indicator Lightí
NOTE
If an indicator light remains illuminated (does
not flash) or if it flashes abnormally, one of the
turn signal bulbs may be burned out.
This indicator light stays on far a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the indicator light will
illuminate when the headlight auto-
leveling system has a malfunction.
If the indicator light illuminates, contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
íSome models.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page198
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (198,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Warning/Indicator Lights and Beep Sounds
qTire Inflation Pressure Warning
Beep Sounds
Beepí
qSeat Belt Warning Beep
The warning beep sound will be heard for
about 3 seconds when there is any
abnormality in tire inflation pressures
(page 5-29).
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON position, a beep sound will be heard
for about 6 seconds.
If the driver or the front passenger's seat
belt is not fastened and the vehicle is
driven at a speed faster than about 20
km/h (12 mph), a beep sound will be
heard again for a specified period of time.
Refer to Seat Belt Warning Light/Beep on
page 5-46.
qAdvanced Keyless Warning (with
Advanced Key)
Warning indicators for the advanced key,
such as “the advanced key removed from
vehicle warning”, use a beep sound and
warning/indicator lights in the instrument
cluster.
Refer to Warning and Beep Sounds on
page 3-18.
qIgnition Key Reminder
If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or
ACC position with the key inserted, a
continuous beep sound will be heard
when the driver's door is opened.
qEngine Oil Level Warning Beep
When the engine oil level is low, the
engine oil level warning light flashes and
the warning beep activates for a brief
period. After the warning light stops
flashing and illuminates, the beeper stops.
If the warning light continues to flash due
to a system malfunction, the beeper does
not sound.
qLights-On Reminderí
If lights are on and the key is removed
from the ignition switch, a continuous
beep sound will be heard when the
driver's door is opened.
Refer to Engine Oil Level Warning Light
on page 5-44.
NOTE
When the advanced keyless function is used
and the start knob is in the ACC position, the
Start Knob Not in Lock Warning Beep (page
qEngine Overrev Warning Beep
The beep sounds to indicate engine
overrev when the tachometer needle
enters the striped zone (page 5-37).
5-56
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page199
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (199,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Type B (With AUTO position)
Lighting Control
qHeadlights
Type A (Without AUTO position)
Turn the headlight switch to turn the
headlights, other exterior lights and
dashboard illumination on or off.
Switch Position
Turn the headlight switch to turn the
headlights, other exterior lights and
dashboard illumination on or off.
Headlights
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker
lights
Dashboard
illumination
Switch Position
Auto
Headlights
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
NOTE
l
If the light switch is left on, the lights will
automatically switch off approximately 30
seconds after turning the ignition switch to
the ACC or LOCK position.
To prevent discharging the battery, do not
leave the lights on while the engine is off
unless safety requires them.
NOTE
To prevent discharging the battery, do not
leave the lights on while the engine is off
unless safety requires them.
l
AUTO (Auto-light control)
When the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position and the ignition switch is
in the ON position, the light sensor senses
the surrounding lightness or darkness and
automatically turns on or off the
headlights, other exterior lights and
dashboard illumination (see chart above).
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page200
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (200,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
NOTE
l
CAUTION
The headlights, other exterior lights and
dashboard illumination may not turn off
immediately even if the surrounding area
becomes well-lit because the light sensor
determines that it is nighttime if the
surrounding area is continuously dark for
several minutes such as inside long tunnels,
traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor
parking lots.
Ø Do not shade the light sensor by
adhering a sticker or a label on
the windshield. Otherwise the light
sensor will not operate correctly.
Light sensor
In this case, the light turns off if the light
switch is turned to the OFF position.
The timing for turning on the headlights,
other exterior lights and dashboard
illumination can be delayed by adjusting
the sensitivity of the light sensor. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding sensor
adjustment.
l
l
The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be
changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø The light sensor also works as a
rain sensor for the auto-wiper
control. Keep hands and scrapers
clear of the windshield when the
wiper lever is in the AUTO position
and the ignition switch is in the
ON position as fingers could be
pinched or the wipers and wiper
blades damaged when the wipers
activate automatically. If you are
going to clean the windshield, be
sure the wipers are turned off
completely - this is particularly
important when clearing ice and
snow - when it is particularly
tempting to leave the engine
running.
Xenon fusion headlight bulbsí
The low-beam bulbs of the headlights
have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a
bright white beam over a wide area.
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement
is necessary.
NOTE
If the headlights flicker, or the brightness
weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a
replacement is necessary. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
5-58
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page201
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (201,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qLights-On Reminderí
qFlashing the Headlights
If lights are on and the key is removed
from the ignition switch, a continuous
beep sound will be heard when the
driver's door is opened.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever fully
toward you. The headlight switch does
not need to be on, and the lever will return
to the normal position when released.
NOTE
When the advanced keyless function is used
and the start knob is in the ACC position, the
Start Knob Not in Lock Warning Beep (page
OFF
Flashing
qHeadlight High-Low Beam
Push the lever forward for high beam.
Pull back to original position for low
beam.
qHeadlight Levelingí
The number of passengers and weight of
cargo in the luggage compartment change
the angle of the headlights.
High beam
Low beam
The angle of the headlights will be
automatically adjusted when turning on
the headlights.
Headlight auto-leveling malfunction
indicator light
This indicator light stays on far a few
seconds when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
Thereafter, the indicator light will
illuminate when the headlight auto-
leveling system has a malfunction.
íSome models.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page202
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (202,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
If the indicator light illuminates, contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
q
Daytime Running Lights (Canada)
qTurn Signal
In Canada, vehicles must be driven with
the headlights on during daytime
operation.
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
For that reason, the daytime running lights
automatically turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
If the indicator light continues to flash
after a turn, manually return the lever to
its original position.
NOTE
The Daytime Running Lights turn off when the
Right turn
Right lane change
OFF
parking brake is applied.
Left lane change
Left turn
Green indicators on the dashboard show
which signal is working.
Lane-change signals
Move the lever slightly toward the
direction of the change ―until the
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It
will return to the off position when
released.
NOTE
If an indicator light stays on without flashing
or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn
signal bulbs may be burned out.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page203
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (203,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Fog Lightsí
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
They help you to see as well as to be seen.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the fog
light switch to the
The headlight switch must be in the
position to turn on the fog lights.
position.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
Only use windshield washer fluid
mixed with anti-freeze protection in
freezing weather conditions:
Using windshield washer fluid
without anti-freeze protection in
freezing weather conditions is
dangerous as it could freeze on the
windshield and block your vision
which could cause an accident.
In addition, make sure the
Fog light switch
To turn them off, rotate the fog light
switch to the OFF position or turn the
headlight switch to the
position.
or OFF
windshield is sufficiently warmed
using the defroster before spraying
the washer fluid.
NOTE
l
The fog lights will turn off when the
headlights are set at high beam.
(With auto-light control)
l
If the fog light switch is in the ON position
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO
position, the fog lights will be turned on
when the headlights, the exterior lights and
dashboard illumination are automatically
turned on.
íSome models.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page204
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (204,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
NOTE
Variable-speed intermittent wipers
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the wiper
blades, the wiper motor is protected from
motor breakdown, overheating and possible
fire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism will
automatically stop operation of the blades, but
only for about 5 minutes.
Set the lever to INT and choose the
interval timing by rotating the ring.
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch and
park off the right-of-way, and remove the snow
and ice.
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and the
blades should operate normally. If they do not
resume functioning, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive to
the side of the road and park off the right-of-
way. Wait until the weather clears before trying
to drive with the wipers inoperative.
INT ring
Type B (With AUTO position)
qWindshield Wipers
Type A (With INT position)
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever
down.
AUTO ― Auto control
LO ― Low speed
HI ― High speed
Turn the wipers on by pulling the lever
down.
INT ― Intermittent
LO ― Low speed
HI ― High speed
For a single wiping cycle, press the lever
up to MIST.
MIST ― Mist
For a single wiping cycle, press the lever
up to MIST.
MIST ― Mist
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page205
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (205,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
AUTO (Auto-wiper control)
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position, the rain sensor senses the
amount of rainfall on the windshield and
turns the wiper on or off automatically
(off―intermittent―low speed―high
speed).
CAUTION
Ø Do not shade the rain sensor by
adhering a sticker or a label on
the windshield. Otherwise the rain
sensor will not operate correctly.
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted by turning the switch on the
wiper lever.
Rain sensor
From the center position (normal), turn
the switch towards (+) for higher
sensitivity (faster response) or turn the
_
switch towards ( ) for less sensitivity
(slower response).
Higher sensitivity
Switch
Center
position
Less sensitivity
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page206
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (206,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Ø When the wiper lever is in the
AUTO position and the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the
wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
NOTE
l
Switching the auto-wiper lever from the
OFF to the AUTO position while driving at
a vehicle speed of 4 km/h (2 mph) or higher
(or after driving the vehicle) activates the
windshield wipers once, after which they
operate according to the rainfall amount.
The auto-wiper control may not operate
when the rain sensor temperature is about
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
If the windshield is struck with
a hand or other object.
If the rain sensor is struck with
a hand or other object from
inside the vehicle.
l
l
_
10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about 85 °C
(185 °F) or higher.
If the windshield is coated with water
repellent, the rain sensor may not be able to
sense the amount of rainfall correctly and
auto-wiper control may not operate
properly.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of
the windshield when the wiper
lever is in the AUTO position and
the ignition switch is in the ON
position as fingers could be
pinched or the wipers and wiper
blades damaged when the wipers
activate automatically.
If you are going to clean the
windshield, be sure the wipers are
turned off completely - this is
particularly important when
clearing ice and snow - when it is
particularly tempting to leave the
engine running.
l
If dirt or foreign matter (e.g. ice or matter
containing salt water) adheres to the
windshield above the rain sensor or if the
windshield is iced, it could cause the wipers
to move automatically. However, if the
wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or
foreign matter, the auto-wiper control will
stop operation. In this case, pull the wiper
lever to the low speed or high speed
position for manual operation, or remove
the ice, dirt or foreign matter by hand to
restore the auto-wiper operation.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page207
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (207,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qWindshield Washer
Headlight Washerí
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer fluid.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position and the headlights must be turned
on.
The headlight washers operate
automatically once every fifth time the
windshield washer operates.
OFF
Washer
If you want to operate only the headlight
washers, pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you twice rapidly.
OFF
NOTE
With the wiper lever in the OFF or INT (Type
A)/AUTO (Type B) position, the wipers will
operate continuously until the lever is
released.
Washer
If the washer does not work, inspect the
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
(With headlight washers)
NOTE
When you pull the windshield wiper lever
twice, the windshield washer may spray a
little.
When the headlights are on, the headlight
washers operate automatically once every fifth
time the windshield washer operates.
Refer to Headlight Washer (page 5-65).
íSome models.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page208
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (208,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
qMirror Defrosterí
Rear Window Defroster
To turn on the mirror defrosters, turn the
ignition switch to the ON position and
press the rear window defroster switch
(page 5-66).
The rear window defroster clears frost,
fog, and thin ice from the rear window.
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position.
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defroster. The rear window
defroster operates for about 15 minutes
and turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates during
operation.
To turn off the rear window defroster
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
Indicator light
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defroster grid inside the window.
NOTE
This defroster is not designed for melting snow.
If there is an accumulation of snow on the rear
window, remove it before using the defroster.
5-66
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page209
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (209,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Horn
Hazard Warning Flasher
To sound the horn, press the
the steering wheel.
mark on
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Hazard warning flasher
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all
the turn signals will flash.
NOTE
l
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l
Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page210
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (210,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
HomeLink Wireless
Control Systemí
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink system with
any garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature:
Using the HomeLink system with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards
is dangerous. (This includes garage
doors manufactured before April 1,
1982.)
NOTE
HomeLink and HomeLink house are registered
trademarks of Johnson Controls.
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3
hand-held transmitters with a single built-
in component in the auto-dimming mirror.
Pressing the HomeLink button on the
auto-dimming mirror activates garage
doors, gates and other devices
Using these garage door openers can
increase the risk of serious injury or
death. For further information,
contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515
or www.homelink.com or your
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
surrounding your home.
Indicator light
Always check the areas surrounding
garage doors and gates for people or
obstructions before programming or
during operation of the HomeLink
system:
Programming or operating the
HomeLink system without verifying
the safety of areas surrounding
garage doors and gates is dangerous
and could result in an unexpected
accident and serious injury if
someone were to be hit.
HomeLink button
CAUTION
HomeLink has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the device.
5-68
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page211
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (211,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
NOTE
FCC ID: NZLOBIHL3
CANADA:4112A-OBIHL3
This device complies with FCC rules part 15.
Operation is subject to the following
conditions:
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons
which can be individually selected and
programmed using the transmitters for
current, on-market devices as follows:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink buttons (buttons one and
three) ― releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Do not hold the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat step 1 to program a second and/
or third hand-held transmitter to the
remaining two HomeLink buttons.
1- This device may not cause any harmful
interference and
2- This device must accept any interference
that may be received including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
The programming will not be erased even if
the battery is disconnected.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)
away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program while keeping the
indicator light in view.
qPre-programming the HomeLink
System
NOTE
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of
the radio-frequency signal.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the
chosen HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons. Do not release the
buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
NOTE
l
Verify that there is a remote control
Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace this Programming
Step 3 with procedures noted in the “Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
transmitter available for the device you
would like to program.
Disconnect the power to the device.
l
q
Programming the HomeLink System
4. After the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light, release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
CAUTION
When programming a garage door
opener or a gate, disconnect the
power to these devices before
performing programming, as
continuous operation of the devices
could damage the motor.
NOTE
If the HomeLink indicator light does not
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-
800-355-3515 for assistance.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page212
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (212,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light.
HomeLink should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.
Do not repeat step 1.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
device should activate when the
HomeLink button is pressed and released.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-
800-355-3515.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” ― step 2.
Do not repeat step 1.
qGate operator/Canadian
Programming
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
“Programming” steps 6―8 to complete
the programming of a rolling code
equipped device (most commonly a
garage door opener).
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission ―
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
6. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit.
If you live in Canada or you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
by using the “Programming” procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with
the following:
7. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE
NOTE
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step
If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
during the “cycling” process to prevent
possible overheating.
8.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the “press/hold/release” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page213
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (213,1)
Driving Your Mazda
Switches and Controls
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release ―
every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-
held transmitter until the frequency signal
has successfully been accepted by
HomeLink. (The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to
complete.
qOperating the HomeLink System
Press the programmed HomeLink button
to operate a programmed device. The
code will continue being transmitted for a
maximum of 20 seconds.
qReprogramming the HomeLink
system
To program a device to HomeLink using a
HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
HomeLink button, proceed with
“Programming” - step 2.
qErasing Programmed HomeLink
Buttons
To erase the existing programming from
all three operating channels, press and
hold the two outside buttons (
,
)
on the auto-dimming mirror until the
HomeLink indicator light begins to flash
after approximately 20 seconds.
Verify that the programming has been
erased when you resell the vehicle.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page214
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (214,1)
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page216
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (216,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qNot Using for a Long Period
Operating Tips
Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes
at least once a month to keep internal
parts lubricated.
qOperating the Climate Control
System
Operate the climate control system with
the engine running.
qCheck the Refrigerant before the
Weather Gets Hot
NOTE
Have the air conditioner checked before
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
efficient. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for refrigerant inspection.
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the fan control dial on for a long
period of time with the ignition switch in the
ON position when the engine is not running.
qClearing the Air Inlet
The air conditioner is filled with
HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that will
not damage the ozone layer.
If the air conditioner is low on refrigerant
or has a malfunction, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,
snow and ice from the hood and the air
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the
system efficiency.
qFoggy Windows
q
Replacement of the Cabin Air Filter
The windows may fog up easily in humid
weather. Use the climate control system to
defog the windows.
If your vehicle is equipped with an air
filter for the air conditioner, it is necessary
to change the filter periodically as
indicated in scheduled maintenance (page
8-3). Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for replacement of the cabin air
filter.
To help defog the windows, operate the
air conditioner to dehumidify the air.
NOTE
The air conditioner may be used along with the
heater to dehumidify the air.
qParking in Direct Sunlight
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then run
the climate control system.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page217
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (217,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Vent Operation
Center vents
Side vents
Center Vents
qAdjusting the Vents
Directing airflow
Side Vents
To adjust the direction of airflow, move
the adjustment knob.
To adjust the direction of airflow, open the
vents and rotate them left and right.
Knob
NOTE
When using the air conditioner under humid
ambient temperature conditions, the system
may blow fog from the vents. This is not a sign
of trouble but a result of humid air being
suddenly cooled.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page218
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (218,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qSelecting the Airflow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Defroster and Floor Vents
Defroster Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents
Floor Vents
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page219
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (219,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Types of the Climate Control System
Manual type and fully automatic type climate control systems are explained separately.
Check your vehicle's climate control type and read the appropriate pages.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page220
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (220,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Manual Type
Windshield defroster switch
A/C switch
Rear window defroster switch
Air intake selector
Temperature control dial
Fan control dial
Mode selector switch
Fan control dial
qControl Switches
Temperature control dial
Cold
Hot
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
0―Fan off
1―Low speed
2―Medium low speed
3―Medium high speed
4―High speed
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page221
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (221,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Mode selector switch
NOTE
l
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
l
(U.S.A., Canada)
When the mode is set to
or
with the
fan control dial in a position other than 0
and the temperature control dial in the
maximum cold position, the air intake
selector switches to the recirculated air
mode and the A/C turns on automatically.
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch
to turn it off.
Press the mode selector switch to select
airflow mode (page 6-4).
NOTE
To set the air vent to
defroster switch.
, press the windshield
Air intake selector
A/C switch
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Press the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan
control dial is set at position 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Press the switch to alternate between the
and
positions. The indicator
light for the selected mode will illuminate.
It is recommended that under normal
conditions the switch be kept in the
outside air position.
Press the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
Outside air position (
)
Outside air is taken into the vehicle. Use
this position for normal ventilation and
heating.
Recirculated air position (
)
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page222
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (222,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
This position can be used when driving on
a dusty road or in similar conditions. It
also helps to provide quicker cooling of
the interior.
NOTE
l
If the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector switch to the position.
If cooler air is desired at face level, set the
mode selector switch at the position
and adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
l
l
l
WARNING
Do not use the
rainy weather:
Using the
position in cold or
position in cold or
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
In the
or
position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
(however, the indicator light does not
illuminate) and the
position is
Windshield defroster switch
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield.
In the
or
position, the
position cannot be changed to the
position.
qCooling (With Air Conditioner)
1. Press the mode selector switch to the
position.
Press the switch to defrost the windshield
and front door windows.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
qHeating
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
1. Press the mode selector switch to the
position.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
5. Adjust the fan control dial and
temperature control dial to maintain
maximum comfort.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page223
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (223,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging
CAUTION
When using the air conditioner while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffic, closely monitor the
1. Press the windshield defroster switch.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the gauge indicates
overheating, turn the air conditioner
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
WARNING
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
NOTE
l
When maximum cooling is desired, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme cold
position and set the air intake selector to
control set to the cold position:
Using the
position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
the
position, then set the fan control
dial to position 4.
If warmer air is desired at floor level, set
l
l
the mode selector switch at the
and adjust the temperature control dial to
maintain maximum comfort.
position
accident. Set the temperature control
to the hot or warm position when
The air to the floor is warmer than air to
the face (except when the temperature
control dial is set at the extreme hot or cold
position).
using the
position.
NOTE
l
For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control dial to the extreme hot
position and the fan control dial to position
4.
qVentilation
1. Press the mode selector switch to the
position.
l
l
If warm air is desired at the floor, set the
mode selector switch to the
position.
In the , or position, the air
2. Set the air intake selector to the
position.
conditioner is automatically turned on
(however, the indicator light does not
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
illuminate) and the
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield.
position is
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
In the
or
position, the
position cannot be changed to the
position.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page224
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (224,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
qDehumidifying (With Air
Conditioner)
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Press the mode selector switch to the
desired position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the
position.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner is
dehumidifying the air and, to use this function,
the temperature does not have to be set to cold.
Therefore, set the temperature control dial to
the desired position (hot or cold) and turn on
the air conditioner when you want to
dehumidify the cabin air.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page225
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (225,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
Fully Automatic Type
Climate control information is displayed on the information display.
Windshield defroster switch Rear window defroster switch
Fan control dial
A/C switch
Temperature control dial
Air intake selector
OFF switch
Auto switch
Mode selector switch
l
l
Outside/Recirculated air selection
Air conditioner operation
qControl Switches
AUTO switch
NOTE
AUTO switch indicator light
l
When on, it indicates AUTO operation, and
the system will function automatically.
l
If any of the following dials or switches are
operated while in AUTO control, the AUTO
switch indicator turns off.
l
Mode selector switch
Fan control dial
A/C switch
Windshield defroster switch
l
l
By pressing the AUTO switch the
following functions will be automatically
controlled in accordance with the selected
set temperature:
l
The functions for dials and switches other
than those operated in the above continue
to operate in AUTO control.
l
Airflow temperature
Amount of airflow
l
l
Selection of airflow mode
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page226
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (226,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
OFF switch
Mode selector switch
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the
climate control system.
The desired airflow mode can be selected
(page 6-4).
NOTE
Temperature control dial
l
With the airflow mode set to
position
and the temperature control dial set at a
medium temperature, heated air is directed
to the feet and a comparably lower air
temperature will flow through the central,
left and right vents.
Cold
Hot
l
To set the air vent to
, press the
windshield defroster switch.
A/C switch
This dial controls temperature.Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
Fan control dial
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO
switch is turned on will turn off the air
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
functions). The air conditioning can be
turned on and off by pressing the A/C
switch while the fan control dial is on.
Slow
Fast
The fan has seven speeds. The selected
speed will be displayed.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page227
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (227,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
NOTE
Windshield defroster switch
l
The air conditioning operates when the A/C
switch is pressed even if the fan control dial
is off.
l
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C.
(Indicator remains on even when system is
off.)
Air intake selector
Press the switch to defrost the windshield
and front door windows.
qOperation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection of
the airflow mode, air intake selector
and amount of airflow will be
automatically controlled.
Outside or recirculated air positions can
be selected. Press the switch to select
outside/recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position (
)
Use this position when going through
tunnels, driving in congested traffic (high
engine exhaust areas) or when quick
cooling is desired.
Outside air position (
)
2. Use the temperature control dial to
select a desired temperature.
Use this position for normal conditions
and defogging.
WARNING
Do not use the
rainy weather:
Using the
position in cold or
position in cold or
Cold
Hot
rainy weather is dangerous as it will
cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
To turn off the system, press the OFF
switch.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page228
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (228,1)
Interior Comfort
Climate Control System
NOTE
NOTE
l
Setting the temperature to maximum high
or low will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
Use the temperature control dial to increase
the air flow temperature and defog the
windshield more quickly.
l
When selecting heat, the system will restrict
airflow until it has warmed to prevent cold
air from blowing out of the vents.
qSunlight/Temperature Sensor
The fully automatic air conditioner
function measures inside and outside
temperatures, and sunlight. It then sets
temperatures inside the passenger
compartment accordingly.
q
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the automatic air
conditioner will not operate properly.
Sunlight sensor
Press the windshield defroster switch.
In this position, the position is
automatically selected, and the air
conditioner automatically turns on. The
air conditioner will directly dehumidify
the air to the front windshield and side
be increased.
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
Using the
position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog
up. Your vision will be hampered,
which could lead to a serious
accident.
Interior temperature sensor
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page229
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (229,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Antenna
Operating Tips for Audio
System
qAM/FM Radio Antenna
The rear window antenna receives both
AM and FM signals.
WARNING
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle:
Adjusting the audio while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
CAUTION
When washing the inside rear
window, use a soft cloth dampened
in lukewarm water, gently wiping the
antenna lines.
Use of glass cleaning products could
damage the antenna.
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident. Always adjust the
audio while the vehicle is stopped.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
qSatellite Radio Antennaí
The satellite radio antenna receives
SIRIUS signals.
CAUTION
Satellite radio antenna
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level
that allows you to hear sounds
outside of the vehicle including car
horns and particularly emergency
vehicle sirens.
NOTE
l
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio system
on for a long period of time when the
engine is not running.
l
If a cellular phone or CB radio is used in
or near the vehicle, it could cause noise to
occur from the audio system, however, this
does not indicate that the system has been
damaged.
íSome models.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page230
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (230,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do reflect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
qRadio Reception
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere. Therefore, they can reach
longer distances than FM signals. Because
of this, two stations may sometimes be
picked up on the same frequency at the
same time.
Ionosphere
FM wave
AM wave
Ionosphere
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days
may provide better reception than clear
days.
Station 1
Station 2
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40―50 km (25―30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be reflected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the reflected signal at
the same time. This causes a slight delay
in reception and may be heard as a broken
sound or a distortion. This problem may
also be encountered when in close
FM Station
proximity to the transmitter.
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
Reflected wave
Direct
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page231
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (231,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Flutter/Skip noise
Strong signal noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are
extremely strong, so the result is noise and
sound breakup at the radio receiver.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from
the transmitter. Reception in such fringe
areas is characterized by sound breakup.
Station 2
Station 1
88.1 MHz
88.3 MHz
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page232
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (232,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
The CD revolves at high speed within
the unit. Defective (cracked or badly
bent) CDs should never be used.
qOperating Tips for CD Player/In-
Dash CD Changer
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in the
CD player/In-dash CD changer may
become clouded with condensation. At
this time, the CD will eject immediately
when placed in the unit. A clouded CD
can be corrected simply by wiping it with
a soft cloth. Clouded optical components
will clear naturally in about an hour. Wait
for normal operation to return before
attempting to use the unit.
l
Do not use non-conventional discs
such as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,
etc. The disc may not eject resulting in
a malfunction.
Handling the CD player/In-dash CD
changer
The following precautions should be
observed.
l
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
l
If the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use
the disc.
l
Do not insert any objects, other than
CDs, into the slot.
Transparent
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page233
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (233,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
A new CD may have rough edges on
Use discs that have been legitimately
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system
may not operate properly.
its inner and outer perimeters. If a disc
with rough edges is used, proper
setting will not be possible and the CD
player/In-dash CD changer will not
play the CD. In addition, the disc may
not eject resulting in a malfunction.
Remove the rough edges in advance by
using a ball-point pen or pencil as
shown below. To remove the rough
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil
against the inner and outer perimeter of
the CD.
l
Be sure never to touch the signal
surface when handling the CDs. Pick
up a CD by grasping the outer edge or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
l
When driving over uneven surfaces,
the sound may jump.
l
l
Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
Dust, finger smudges, and dirt can
decrease the amount of light reflected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer has
been designed to play CDs bearing the
identification logo as shown. No other
discs can be played.
become soiled, gently wipe it with a
soft cloth from the center of the CD to
the edge.
Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
l
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page234
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (234,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
Insert discs one by one. If two discs are
inserted at the same time, the system
may not operate properly.
Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels, or
adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label affixed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
l
The CD player/In-dash CD changer
ejects the CD if the CD is inserted
upside down. Also dirty and/or
defective CDs may be ejected.
l
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player/In-dash CD changer.
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal affixed to it.
This unit may not be able to play
certain CD-R/CD-RWs made using a
computer or music CD recorder due to
disc characteristics, scratches,
smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust or
condensation on the lens inside the
unit.
qOperating tips for MP3
l
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a license
for private, non-commercial use and does not
convey a license nor imply any right to use this
product in any commercial (i.e. revenue-
generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such as
pay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.
An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit
l
l
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
l
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
l
This unit may not be able to play
l
This audio system handles MP3 files
certain discs made using a computer
due to the application (writing
software) setting used. (For details,
consult the store where the application
was purchased.)
that have been recorded on CD-R/CD-
RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have been
recorded using the following formats
can be played:
l
ISO 9660 level 1
ISO 9660 level 2
Joliet extended format
Romeo extended format
l
It is possible that certain text data, such
l
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical
data (CD-DA) is playing.
The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
l
l
l
This unit handles MP3 files
l
conforming to the MP3 format
containing both header frames and data
frames.
l
Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
l
This unit can play multi-session
recorded discs that have up to 40
sessions.
This unit can play MP3s with sampling
l
frequencies of 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48
kHz.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page235
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (235,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
This unit can play MP3 files that have
Folder
No.
been recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to
320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insure
enjoyment of music with consistent
sound quality, it is recommended to use
discs that have been recorded at a bit
rate of 128 kbps or more.
: Folder : Track (File)
01
02
03
04
3
2
4
l
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3 files, playback of the two file
types differs depending on how the
disc was recorded.
05
l
Packet written discs cannot be played
on this unit.
This unit does not play CDs recorded
using MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3
PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.
06
l
5
1
About folders and files
Level1
Level3
l
Level2
Level4
The order of hierarchy for MP3 files
and folders during playback or other
functions is from shallow to deep. The
arrangement and playing order of a
recorded disc containing MP3 files is
as follows:
Playback may not occur in the above
hierarchy depending on the audio unit.
l
l
l
The folder order is automatically
assigned and this order cannot be
optionally set.
Any folder without an MP3 file will be
ignored. (It will be skipped and the
folder number will not be displayed.)
MP3 files not conforming to the MP3
format containing both header frames
and data frames will be skipped and
not played.
This unit will play MP3 files that have
up to eight levels. However, the more
levels a disc has, the longer it will take
to initially start playing. It is
recommended to record discs with two
levels or less.
l
File number
A numerical file number is assigned
to each file in a folder in the order of
hierarchy from shallow to deep.
l
Folder number
A numerical folder number is
assigned to each folder in the order
of hierarchy from shallow to deep.
l
NOTE
Folders and tracks (files) within the same
hierarchy play in the order they were written to
the disc depending on the write software.
l
l
A single disc with up to 512 files can
be played and a single folder with up to
255 files can be played.
When naming an MP3 file, be sure to
add an MP3 file extension (.mp3) after
the file name.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page236
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (236,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
The maximum number of characters
Specialized glossary
MP3
that can be used for file names is as
follows. However, this unit will only
display up to 30 characters, including
the file extension (.mp3).
Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer 3”.
A technical standard for audio
compression as decided by an ISO
(International Organization for
Standardization) MPEG working group.
Use of MP3 allows for audio data to be
compressed to approximately a tenth of
the source data size.
Maximum number of
characters in a file name
(including a separator “.”
and the three letters of the
file extension)
ISO9660 level 1
ISO9660 level 2
12*
31*
ISO 9660
Joliet extended
format
64
An international standard for logical
formatting of CD-ROM files and folders.
It is divided into three separate levels
based on differences in file naming
procedures, data configuration and other
characteristics.
Romeo extended
format
128
* English one-byte characters (capitalized only) and
underbar “_” are available.
CAUTION
Multi-session
This unit can only play MP3 files that
have an MP3 file extension (.mp3)
attached. Do not attach an MP3 file
extension to any other type file as it
could cause noise to be emitted or a
malfunction in the unit.
A session is the complete amount of data
recorded from the beginning to the end of
a single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-
RW data recording. Multi-session refers to
the existence of data from two or more
sessions on a single disc.
About ID3 Tag display
Sampling
l
This unit can only display ID3 Tag
Refers to the process of encoding analog
audio data at regular intervals and
converting it to digital data. The sampling
rate refers to the number of times a
sample is taken in one second and is
expressed in Hz units. Increasing the
sampling rate improves the sound quality
but also increases the data size.
album, track and artist names that have
been input using Ver.1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3
formats. Any other data that may have
been input cannot be displayed.
l
This unit can only display English
(including numerals) one-byte
characters. Use only English (including
numerals) one-byte characters when
inputting ID3 tags. Two-byte characters
and some special symbols cannot be
displayed.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page237
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (237,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Bit rate
Refers to the volume of data per second,
expressed in bps (bits per second).
Generally, the larger the number of the
transfer bit rate when compressing an
MP3 file, the more information regarding
musical reproduction it carries, and
therefore the better the sound quality.
Packet writing
A general term for the method, similar to
that used for floppy discs or hard drives,
of recording the required file in a single
increment on a CD-R and similar.
ID3 Tag
ID3 tag is a method for storing
information related to the music in an
MP3 file. Information such as track, artist
and album name can be stored. This
content can be freely edited using ID3
editing function software.
VBR
Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. While
CBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generally
used, VBR varies the bit rate for audio
compression according to compression
conditions and this allows for
compression with preference given to
sound quality.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page238
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (238,1)
MEMO
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page239
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (239,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Audio Set
l
Audio information is displayed on the information display.
There are two types of In-dash CD changers. Check which In-dash CD changer your
vehicle is equipped with.
l
CD Player
In-Dash CD Changer (non-MP3 compatible)
In-dash CD Changer (MP3 compatible)
Power/Volume/Sound Controls .............................................................................. page 6-26
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page240
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (240,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qPower/Volume/Sound Controls
Power/Volume dial
Audio control dial
Power ON/OFF
Audio sound adjustment
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
1. Press the audio control dial to select the
function. The selected function will be
indicated.
Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
Press the power/volume dial again to turn
the audio system off.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being discharged,
do not leave the audio system on for a long
period of time when the engine is not running.
Volume adjustment
To adjust the volume, turn the power/
volume dial.
Turn the power/volume dial to the right to
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page241
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (241,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
* Depending on the mode selected, the
indication changes.
Standard audio-equipped model
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the
selected functions as follows:
*
Standard audio-equipped model
Indication
Turn Left Turn Right
Select mode
Decrease
bass
Increase
bass
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
*
front
rear
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
*
left
right
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Bose Sound System-equipped model
Bose® Sound System-equipped model
Indication
Turn Left Turn Right
*
*
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Decrease
bass
Increase
bass
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
front
rear
Shift the
Shift the
sound to the sound to the
left
right
*
OFF
ON
*
OFF
ON
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page242
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (242,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
Turn the audio control dial to select ALC
OFF or ALC LEVEL1―7 modes. The
selected mode will be indicated.
About 5 seconds after selecting any mode, the
volume function will be automatically selected.
To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press
the audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unit
will beep and “CLEAR” will be displayed.
Automatic Level Control (ALC)
The automatic level control is a feature
that automatically adjusts audio volume
and sound quality according to the vehicle
speed.
The volume increases in accordance with
the increase in vehicle speed, and
decreases as vehicle speed decreases.
Select the desired ALC mode.
Mode
Volume change
No change
Minimum
*AudioPilot® 2 (Bose® Sound System-
equipped model)
Medium
AudioPilot® 2 automatically adjusts audio
volume and sound quality in accordance
with the level of noise entering the vehicle
interior while driving. When AudioPilot®
2 is turned on, the system automatically
calculates the conditions for optimum
hearing of sound which may be difficult
to hear depending on exterior noise.
* AudioPilot® 2 is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
Maximum
*Centerpoint® (Bose® Sound System-
equipped model)
Centerpoint® offers you the experience of
5.1-channel surround sound in your
vehicle even with your conventional 2-
channel stereo CDs.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page243
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (243,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Centerpoint® can be set on or off.
NOTE
Centerpoint® operates optimally with a 2-
l
channel stereo CD. MP3 audio files can be
played, however, MP3 audio files encoded
with high compression may result in poor
sound quality.
Centerpoint® is available for 2-channel
l
stereo audio except for AM radio/FM radio/
SIRIUS digital satellite radio/AUX.
* Centerpoint® is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
BEEP setting
The beep-sound when operating the audio
system can be set on or off.
ILLM EFT setting (Illumination setting
during operation)
The audio system illumination during
operation can be set on or off.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page244
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (244,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Radio
Band selector button
Channel preset buttons
Auto memory
button
Scan button
Seek tuning
button
Manual tuning dial
Radio ON
Tuning
Press a band selector button (
turn the radio on.
) to
The radio has the following tuning
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
on preset channels.
Band selection
Successively pressing the band selector
button ( ) switches the bands as
follows: FM1→FM2→AM.
NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows
or the battery is disconnected), the preset
channels will be erased.
The selected mode will be indicated. If
FM stereo is being received, “ST” will be
displayed.
Manual tuning
NOTE
Turning the manual tuning dial will
change the frequency higher or lower.
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,
reception automatically changes from
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the
“ST” indicator will go out.
Seek tuning
Pressing the seek tuning button (
,
)
will cause the tuner to seek a higher or
lower frequency automatically.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page245
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (245,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
Press and hold the auto memory button
If you continue to press and hold the button,
the frequency will continue changing without
stopping.
(
) for about 2 seconds until a beep
sound is heard; the system will
automatically scan and temporarily store
up to 6 stations with the strongest
frequencies in each selected band in that
area.
Scan tuning
Press the scan button (
) to
automatically sample strong stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about 5
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan
After scanning is completed, the station
with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed.
button (
) again during this interval.
Press and release the auto memory button
Preset channel tuning
(
) to recall stations from the auto-
stored stations. One stored station will be
selected each time; its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
6 AM and 12 FM stations.
1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.
NOTE
If no stations can be tuned after scanning
operations, “A” will be displayed.
2. Depress a channel preset button for
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is
heard. The preset channel number and
station frequency will be displayed.
The station is now held in the memory.
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select AM,
FM1, or FM2 and then press its
channel preset button. The station
frequency and the channel number will
be displayed.
NOTE
If the power supply is interrupted (fuse blows
or the battery is disconnected), the preset
channels will be erased.
Auto memory tuning
This is especially useful when driving in
an area where the local stations are not
known. Additional AM/FM stations can
be stored without disturbing the
previously set channels.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page246
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (246,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Satellite Radio
Channel preset buttons
Satellite button
Instant replay
button
Auto memory
button
Scan button
Seek tuning
button
Category button
Manual tuning dial/Electronic serial number button
Display feed dial
Information display
All operations of the satellite radio are displayed on the Information display.
Channel number, Channel name, Category name, Artist name, Song title,
ID code, Preset channel number, Bank number, Error signs
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page247
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (247,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
What is satellite radio?
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
- Increase the separation between the
equipment and tuner.
With over 130 channels, SIRIUS Satellite
Radio brings you more of what you love.
Get 69 channels of 100 % commercial-
free music, plus all your favorite sports,
news, talk and entertainment. Everything
worth listening to is now on SIRIUS.
100 % Commercial-free Music―With
music from every genre, artist-dedicated
channels, live performances and more,
SIRIUS is the home of 100 %
commercial-free music.
Live Sports Play-by-Play & Expert
Talk―Hear every NFL game, every
NASCAR® race and college sports
coverage from over 150 schools. Plus
24/7 sports talk with channels like
SIRIUS NFL Radio, SIRIUS NASCAR
Radio and more.
Exclusive Entertainment and
Talk―The biggest names, compelling
talk, hilarious comedy. Hear Howard
Stern, Martha Stewart, Jamie Foxx, Blue
Collar Comedy, Playboy Radio, political
talk and more.
World-class News―Stay informed with
FOX, CNN, CNBC, NPR®, BBC and
more.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the tuner is
connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/
TV technician for help.
Plus local traffic and weather.
Family & Kids―Entertain the entire
family with Radio Disney, Kids Place
Live, Laugh USA and more.
Sign up for SIRIUS Radio today! For
more information, visit www.sirius.com.
Satellite radio can be subscribed to and
received in the United States. (Except
Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
How to Activate Satellite Radio
You must call SIRIUS to activate your
service. Activation is free and takes only a
few minutes.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page248
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (248,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
SIRIUS service uses an ID code to
identify your radio. This code is needed to
activate SIRIUS service, and report any
problems.
Every time the satellite button is pressed,
the bank changes in the order shown
below.
To activate you SIRIUS radio tuner, call a
SIRIUS customer service specialist at 1-
888-539-7474 or you can visit SIRIUS
online at www.sirius.com.
SR1
SR2
SR3
Please have the following information
ready:
l
SIRIUS ID (12-digit electronic serial
no., or ESN*)
l
Valid credit card information (may not
be required at initial sign-up)
NOTE
SR1, SR2 and SR3: six stations can be stored
in each bank for convenient access to your
favorite stations.
Be sure you are parked outside with a
clear view of open sky, you will be
instructed to turn on your radio (in SAT
mode and tuned to channel 184).
Activation typically takes only 2―5
minutes.
Operation in the initial state
It may take some time to start up the
equipment when it is in the initial state,
when there is a change in the user's
subscription condition, or when the
SIRIUS channel map is changed.
“UPDATING xx%” is displayed when the
SIRIUS channel map is changed. If the
unit is initialized or the user contract
content is changed, “UPDATING” is
displayed. Updating could take as long as
three minutes depending on the
geographical area. When the unit is in an
initialized state, channel 184 is displayed
after the display indicates
“UPDATING 100%”. If the SIRIUS
channel map or the user contract content
is changed, the channel prior to the
change is displayed after “UPDATING” is
displayed. After the initialization display,
it may take as long as 12 seconds to
receive channel 184.
*ESN: Electronic Serial Number
SIRIUS operation
All operations of the satellite radio are
conducted by means of the audio unit.
SIRIUS radio mode selection
When the satellite button is pressed during
ACC ON, it will play the last SIRIUS
channel in use before the mode was
switched over to another mode or the
power was turned off.
When the satellite button is pressed in a
mode other than the SIRIUS mode, the
last channel in use will be received.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page249
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (249,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
NOTE
Do not perform the following operation while
“UPDATING” is displayed. Otherwise, the
updating procedure will be cancelled.
If the last channel selected has become
unavailable because of a channel update the
above indication is displayed until any button
is pressed.
l
Turning off the audio power
l
Switching to other modes
Preset channel programming
l
Turning the ignition off
(Programming with “channel number”
display)
When the SIRIUS mode is switched to
another mode, or when the power is
turned off, the present channel which is
being received is stored as the last
channel.
1. Select the desired channel to be
programmed. At this point, the
following is displayed:
[SR
number)]
(bank number)
(channel
Channel selection
Turning the manual tuning dial allows you
to select the desired receiving channel.
2. Keep pressing the channel preset
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
l
Turn the knob clockwise: Channel Up
Turn the knob counterclockwise:
The programming process is complete
after the channel number flashes. Then,
[SR
and a beep sound is heard at the same
time.
l
Channel Down
(bank number)] is displayed
Unsubscribed channel
When a selected station has not been
subscribed to, the display indicates the
following:
3. [SR
(preset number)
are displayed.
(bank number)
CH
(channel number)]
[CALL
888] and [539
SIRI]
(Flashes alternately)
(Programming with “text” display (e.g.
channel name))
NOTE
When the subscription contract is canceled, all
of the channels including channel 184 appear
as unsubscribed.
1. Select the desired channel to be
programmed. At this point, the
following is displayed:
Invalid channel
[SR
(bank number)
(selected
text (e.g. channel name))]
When a selected channel is not
broadcasting, [SR
INVALID] is displayed for one second,
followed by [SR (bank number)
CHANNEL], which is also displayed for
one second. The display then returns to
the previous valid channel.
(bank number)
2. Keep pressing the channel preset
button for 1.5 seconds or more.
The programming process is complete
after the text (e.g. channel name)
flashes. Then, [SR
(bank number)]
is displayed and you will hear beep
sound at the same time.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page250
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (250,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
3. SR
(preset number)
are displayed.
(bank number)
CH
Highest category → All categories →
Lowest category
(channel number)]
NOTE
While all categories are selected, all channels
covering a category can be accessed
(Category off condition).
4. Three seconds later, it returns to normal
display. [SR (bank number) (text
(e.g. channel name))]
NOTE
Channel selection within a category
Six stations can be stored in each bank, SR1,
SR2, and SR3 for convenient access to your
favorite stations.
If you are in a selected category and the
channel number is displayed, turning the
manual tuning dial moves the channel
number up/down in that category.
Preset channel call-up
l
Turn the manual tuning dial clockwise:
Press and release the channel preset
button,
[SR
Channel Up
Turn the manual tuning dial
l
(bank number)
CH
(preset
counterclockwise: Channel Down
number)
(channel number)] appears.
NOTE
When the preset button is pressed during
text mode, its channel number is
displayed first for three second and then
its text is displayed.
The channel number needs to be indicated in
the display to use manual tuning dial for this
function.
NOTE
Scan tuning
In the initial setting, all channels are preset to
184.
Press the scan button (
automatically sample stations. Scanning
stops at each station for about five
seconds. To hold a station, press the scan
button (
) to
Category change
Press the category button (UP or DOWN)
and select the desired category.
) again during this interval.
l
NOTE
Press the category button (UP):
l
Unsubscribed channels, invalid channels
and parental lock channels are not subject
to the scan, therefore these channels will
skip automatically.
Category up
Press the category button (DOWN):
l
Category down
Every time the category (UP) button is
pressed for 1.5 second or less, the
category is changed over in the order
shown below.
At this time, the lowest (smallest-number)
channel within the category indicated is
received.
l
You can scan all channels while all
categories are selected. If you are in a
selected category, you can only scan the
channels in that category.
When the highest (or lowest) category is
reached, the category is changed over in
the order shown below.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page251
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (251,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
l
Channel number, channel name,
category, artist, song titles and info
display
The long name is displayed first, and
three seconds later the short name is
displayed. If there is no short name, the
long name is displayed.
If there are more than eight characters
in the channel name, it is possible to
display the remaining part of the
channel name one character at a time
each time the display feed dial is
rotated one increment clockwise.
While the short name is displayed,
turning the display feed dial switches
the display to the long name.
Each time the display button is pressed
during SIRIUS reception, the display of
the text data is changed over in the order
shown below.
l
l
Channel number
Song title
Channel name
Category
name
Three seconds after scrolling the long
name, the display automatically returns
to the first part of the long name. Three
more seconds and the short name
appears.
Info
Artist name
l
If there is no channel name,
“No TITLE” is displayed.
NOTE
l
Eight characters are displayed on one
screen.
(Category name display)
l
When the display button is pressed
l
By turning the display feed dial
while in channel name display mode, it
changes to the category name display
mode.
There are short (eight fixed characters)
and long names for the category name.
counterclockwise, it is possible to display
the remaining part of the title one character
at a time each time the display feed dial is
rotated one increment counterclockwise.
l
l
The long name is displayed first, and
(Channel number display)
three seconds later the short name is
displayed. If there is no short name, the
long name is displayed.
l
When the display button is pressed
while in info display mode, the mode
changes to the channel number display
mode.
l
If there are more than eight characters
in the category name, it is possible to
display the remaining part of the
category name one character at a time
each time the display feed dial is
rotated one increment clockwise.
While the short name is displayed,
turning the display feed dial switches
the display to the long name.
(Channel name display)
l
When the display button is pressed
while in channel number display mode,
it changes to channel name display
mode.
l
l
There are short (eight fixed characters)
and long names for the channel name.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page252
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (252,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
l
Three seconds after scrolling the long
(INFO (such as composer's name)
display)
name, the display automatically returns
to display the first part of the long
name. Three more seconds and the
short name appears.
l
When the display button is pressed
while in song title display mode, it
changes to the INFO display mode.
If there are more than eight characters
l
l
If there is no category name,
“No CATEGORY” is displayed.
in the composer's name, it is possible to
display the remaining part of the name
one character at a time each time the
display feed dial is rotated one
increment clockwise.
Three seconds after scrolling the text,
the display automatically returns to
display the first part of the text.
(Artist name display)
l
When the display button is pressed
while in category name display mode,
it changes to the artist name display
mode.
l
l
If there are more than eight characters
l
in the artist's name, it is possible to
display the remaining part of the artist
name one character at a time each time
the display feed dial is rotated one
increment clockwise.
If there is no composer name,
“No INFO” is displayed.
Instant replay
This function allows you to rewind and
replay the program that you were
previously or are currently listening to.
Press the instant replay button ( ).
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed (about 1.5 seconds), playback
starts from the beginning of the current
program.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed twice, playback starts from the
beginning of the previous program.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed for about 1.5 seconds or longer,
the program is reversed while the button
is being pressed.
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed (about 1.5 seconds), playback
starts from the beginning of the next
program. When the seek tuning button
) is pressed (about 1.5 seconds) while
the last program is being played, the
instant replay mode is cancelled.
l
Three seconds after scrolling the artist
name, the display automatically return
to display the first part of the artist's
name.
If there is no artist's name,
“No ARTIST” is displayed.
l
(Song title display)
l
When the display button is pressed
while in artist name display mode, it
changes to the song title display mode.
l
If there are more than eight characters
in the song title, it is possible to display
the remaining part of the song title one
character at a time each time the
display feed dial is rotated one
increment clockwise.
l
Three more seconds after scrolling the
song title, the display automatically
returns to display the first part of the
song title.
(
l
If there is no song title, “No SONG” is
displayed.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page253
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (253,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
When the seek tuning button ( ) is
pressed for 1.5 seconds or longer, the
program is fast-forwarded while the
button is being pressed. When pressing
and holding the button until the end of the
program, the instant replay mode is
cancelled.
When the instant replay button is pressed
again, playback is paused, or playback
starts if it has been paused.
(If the SIRIUS ID (ESN) for the tuner
does not display)
If “ESN
FAIL” is displayed after
pressing the ESN button for 1.5 seconds
or longer, contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Initialization of ID code
If the registered ID code is forgotten,
return the ID code to the default [0000] by
performing the following steps:
Instant replay (PAUSE)
Setting condition: SAT mode
If the instant replay button is pressed
while the instant replay mode is off,
instant replay mode is turned on in a
paused condition (PAUSE). Press the
instant replay button again to resume
playback from the point at which it was
paused.
(Master code input preparation)
1. Press and hold the auto memory
button, then press channel preset button
4. Hold both buttons together for 1.5
seconds.
NOTE
2. “ENTER PIN” appears for two seconds
which indicates that it is in code input
mode.
l
If the channel is changed, the instant replay
buffer data is deleted.
l
After turning on the power and switching to
SIRIUS digital satellite radio mode, the
instant replay mode is not available for
several seconds after changing channels.
3. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates
that it is ready for code input.
(Master code input)
Displaying the SIRIUS ID (ESN)
4. Input the master code using the channel
preset buttons 1-4.
When the ESN button is pressed for 1.5
seconds or longer, a 12-digit Electronic
Serial Number (ESN) for the SIRIUS
tuner is displayed.
(The master code is already set at the
time of factory shipment.)
(Master code input determination)
[SR
(bank number)
(first eight
digits of SIRIUS ID (ESN))] are
displayed.
The four digits following the first eight
digits are displayed by turning the display
feed dial clockwise.
While the last four digits of the 12-digit
SIRIUS ID (ESN) are displayed, turning
the display feed dial displays the first
eight digits of SIRIUS ID (ESN).
5. Determine the master code which has
been input by pressing the auto
memory button.
6. “PIN CLEARED” appears which
indicates that the master code input has
been completed.
7. The ID code is set to the default [0000]
and the initialization process is
completed.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page254
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (254,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
3. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates
Master code:
that it is ready for code input.
The Master Code is used to initialize or re-
initialize the ID code in the event that the code
is not set to [0000] and/or the personalized ID
code is not known. The initialization process
resets the ID code to [0000]. The master code
can potentially defeat the intent of the security
of the parental lock if it is located by persons
not authorized by the owner to access certain
channels.
4. Input the registered ID code using
channel preset buttons 1-4.
Example: When the registered ID code
is “2323”, input “2323”. At this time
“SR1 2323” is displayed.
Press 1 for the first digit, 2 for the
second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the
last digit. For example, if your number
is 2323, press 1 three times (includes
0), 2 four times, 3 three times, and 4
four times. If the display goes off while
inputting, begin from Step 1.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio Master Code: [0913]
NOTE
l
When a numeric value other than the
NOTE
master code is input and the auto memory
button is pressed, “SR1 Err” is displayed
and then it returns to the “SR1 - - - -”
display again.
The registered ID code is the default [0000] at
the time of factory shipment. If [0000] results
in “Err” on the display, go to the
“INITIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section to
reset to [0000].
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
(Verification with the registered ID
code)
l
auto memory button are used for inputting
the ID code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be
used.
5. Determine the input code by pressing
the auto memory button.
6. If it does not match with the previously
registered code, “SR1 Err” is displayed
and then it returns to “SR1 - - - -”.
Change of ID code
Setting condition: SAT mode
When changing the ID code, the new ID
code is input after the previous one is
input first.
7. If it matches with the previously
registered code, “ENTER PIN” appears
again and it switches to code input
mode.
(Registered ID code input)
8. “SR1 - - - -” appears, and it is ready for
1. Press and hold the auto memory
button, then press channel preset button
5. Hold both buttons together for 1.5
seconds.
input of the new ID code.
(New ID code input)
9. Input the new ID code using channel
preset buttons 1-4.
2. “ENTER PIN” appears for two seconds
which indicates that it is in code input
mode.
Example: If “1234” is input as the new
code, “SR1 1234” is displayed.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page255
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (255,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
(New ID code input determination)
(Registered ID code input)
10. Determine the new ID code which
has been input by pressing the auto
memory button.
5. Input the registered ID code using
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example: If
the registered ID code is “2323”, input
“2323”. At this time “SR1 2323” is
displayed.
11. “PIN CHANGED” appears for three
seconds which indicates that the new
ID code input has been completed.
(Registered ID code input
determination)
12. It returns to the former display.
6. Determine the code which has been
input by pressing the auto memory
button.
NOTE
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
auto memory button are used for input of
the ID code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be
used.
7. If it does not match the registered code,
“SR1 Err” is displayed and then it
returns to “SR1 - - - -”.
l
8. If it matches the registered code,
“SR1 LOCK” appears for three
seconds which indicates that the code
input has been completed.
Individual channel locking
If a channel is locked, the channel is
muted.
9. “SR1 LOCK 100” appears which
indicates that the parental lock is
activated. At this time, mute is on and
no sound is heard.
NOTE
If the registered ID code is forgotten, return
the ID code to the default [0000]. (See
“INTIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section)
NOTE
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
(Locking a channel)
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
auto memory button are used for input of
the ID code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be
used.
1. Select a channel to be locked by
turning the manual tuning dial.
Example: Select channel 100
l
(Registered ID code input preparation)
2. Press and hold the auto memory
button, then press channel preset button
6. Hold both buttons together for 1.5
seconds.
Lock cancellation
Setting condition: SAT mode
(Releasing a locked channel)
3. “ENTER PIN” appears for two seconds
which indicates that it is in code input
mode.
1. Select a channel to be released by
turning the manual tuning dial.
Example: Select the locked channel
(i.e. 100). At this time,
4. “SR1 - - - -” appears which indicates
that it is ready for code input.
“SR1 LOCK 100” is displayed.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page256
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (256,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
(Registered ID code input preparation)
NOTE
l
If an ID code is not input for ten seconds,
“Err” is displayed and it returns to the
former display.
Channel preset buttons 1, 2, 3, 4 and the
auto memory button are used for input of
the ID code. Buttons 5 and 6 cannot be
used.
2. Press and hold the auto memory
button, then press channel preset button
6. Hold both buttons together for 1.5
seconds.
l
3. “ENTER PIN” appears for two seconds
which indicates that it is in code input
mode.
4. “SR1 - - - -” appears, which indicates
that it is ready for code input.
(Registered ID code input)
5. Input the registered ID code using
channel preset buttons 1-4. Example:
When the registered ID code is “2323”,
input “2323”. At this time “SR1 2323”
is displayed.
NOTE
If “Err” is displayed, go to the
“INITIALIZATION OF ID CODE” section to
reset the ID code to [0000].
(Registered ID code input
determination)
6. Determine the input code by pressing
the auto memory button.
7. If it does not match the registered code,
“SR1 Err” is displayed and then it
returns to “SR1 - - - -”.
8. If it matches the registered code,
“SR1 UNLOCK” appears for three
seconds which indicates that the code
input has been completed.
9. “SR1 100” appears which indicates that
the parental lock is off. At this time,
sound is heard.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page257
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (257,1)
MEMO
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page258
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (258,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
Load button
CD slot
CD play button
CD eject button
Scan button
Fast-forward/Track
up button
Reverse/Track down
button
Display button
Repeat button
Random button
Type
Playable data
Playback
Music CD player
(non-MP3 compatible)
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit.
· Music data (CD-DA)
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”
will flash on and off.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
When the load button (
CD will load and play even if the CD eject
button ( ) had been previously pressed.
) is pressed, the
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play begins
while the player reads the digital signals on
the CD.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button
Ejecting the CD
(
) to advance through a track at high
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page259
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (259,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Track search
Message display
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
Music scan
This feature helps to find a program by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.
Press the scan button (
) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
Press the scan button (
cancel scan playback.
) again to
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
This feature makes it possible to listen to
a selection repeatedly.
Press the repeat button (
) during
playback. The current selection will be
repeated (“RPT” will be displayed).
Press the repeat button (
to cancel repeat playback.
) once again
Random playback
This feature allows the CD player to
randomly select the order of the songs.
Press the random button (
) during
playback. The next selection will be
randomly selected (“RDM” will be
displayed).
Press the random button (
) once
again to cancel random playback.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page260
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (260,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qOperating the In-Dash CD Changer
Music CD player (non-MP3 compatible)
Channel preset buttons
Music CD/MP3 CD player (MP3 compatible)
CD slot CD play button
Load button
Scan button
CD eject button
Disc up/Folder up
button
Fast-forward/Track
up button
Disc down/Folder
down button
Reverse/Track down
button
Display button
Repeat button
Random button
Display feed dial
There are two types of In-dash CD
changers. Check which In-dash CD
changer your vehicle is equipped with.
NOTE
The CD will begin playback automatically
after insertion.
A CD cannot be inserted while the display
reads “WAIT”. A beeping sound can be heard
during this waiting time.
Type
Playable data
Music CD player
(non-MP3 compatible)
· Music data (CD-DA)
There will be a short lapse before play begins
while the player reads the digital signals on
the CD.
Music CD/MP3 CD
player
(MP3 compatible)
· Music data (CD-DA)
· MP3 file
NOTE
Normal insertion
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA) and
MP3 files, playback of the two file types differs
depending on how the disc was recorded.
1. Press the load button (
).
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
Inserting the CD
Inserting CDs into desired tray number
The CD must be label-side up when
inserting. The auto-loading mechanism
will set the CD and begin play.
1. Press and hold the load button (
)
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page261
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (261,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
2. Press the channel preset button for the
desired tray number while “WAIT” is
displayed.
Ejecting CDs from desired tray number
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
)
3. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.
NOTE
The CD cannot be inserted to the desired tray
number if the number is already occupied.
2. Press the channel preset button for the
desired CD number for less than 5
seconds after the beep sound is heard.
Multiple insertion
3. Pull out the CD.
1. Press and hold the load button (
)
Multiple ejection
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
1. Press and hold the CD eject button (
for about 2 seconds until a beep sound
is heard.
)
2. When “IN” is displayed, insert the CD.
3. When “IN” is displayed again, insert
The “DISC OUT” display flashes.
the next CD.
2. Press the CD eject button ( ) again
for less than 5 seconds after the beep
sound is heard.
NOTE
The first-inserted CD will be played
automatically when:
NOTE
l
No other CD is inserted within 15 seconds
If the button is not pressed and about 5
seconds have elapsed while “DISC OUT” is
flashing, CDs are automatically ejected.
after “IN” is displayed.
The CD trays are full.
l
Displaying the CD-inserted tray
number
3. Pull out the CD, then the next CD will
be ejected.
When you want to know the number for a
CD-inserted tray, press the display button
NOTE
l
CDs will be ejected starting with the one
(
). The tray number will be displayed
with the lowest number.
All CDs in the tray will be ejected
continuously.
CDs can be ejected when the ignition
for 5 seconds.
l
Ejecting the CD
Normal ejection
l
switch is off. Press and hold the CD eject
button ( ) for about 2 seconds and all
CDs will eject.
1. Press the CD eject button ( ). The
disc number and “DISC OUT” will be
displayed.
Playback
2. Pull out the CD.
Press the CD play button ( ) to start
play when a CD is in the unit.
If a CD is not in the unit when the CD
play button ( ) is pressed, “NO DISC”
will flash on and off.
NOTE
When the CD is ejected during play, the next
CD will be played automatically.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page262
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (262,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Fast-forward/Reverse
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback will
resume where scan was selected.
Press and hold the fast-forward button
(
) to advance through a track at high
speed.
Repeat playback
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
Track search
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “RPT” is displayed.
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) once to
skip back to the beginning of the current
track.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
During MP3 CD playback
(Track repeat)
Disc search
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
To change the disc, press the DISC button
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is
displayed.
(
or ) during playback.
During MP3 CD playback
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
To change the disc, press the DISC button
(
or ) for 1.5 seconds or more during
playback.
(Folder repeat)
Folder search (during MP3 CD
playback)
1. Press the repeat button (
) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“FOLDER RPT” is displayed.
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ) for less than 1.5
seconds, or press the folder up button (
for less than 1.5 seconds to advance to the
next folder.
)
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Music scan
Random playback
This feature helps to find a program by
playing about the first 10 seconds of each
track.
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
During music CD playback
1. Press the random button (
) during
Press the scan button (
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will flash).
) during
playback to play the tracks in the CD
randomly. “RDM” is displayed.
Press the scan button (
cancel scan playback.
) again to
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page263
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (263,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
During MP3 CD playback
(Folder random)
MP3 CD
Disc number/File
number/Elapsed time
display
1. Press the random button (
) during
playback to play the tracks in the folder
randomly. “FOLDER RDM” is
displayed.
Disc tray number
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
Disc number/Folder
number/File number
(CD random)
File name
Folder name
1. Press the random button (
) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly.
Album name (ID3 Tag)
“DISC RDM” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Song name (ID3 Tag)
Artist name (ID3 Tag)
Switching the display (MP3 compatible
type)
For files with a file name or other name
that have been input, the display changes
in the order of the file names or other
names each time the display button (
is pressed during playback.
Music CD
NOTE
(MP3 CD)
This unit can only read English (including
numerals) one-byte characters. Depending on
the CD writing software used, proper display
may not be possible.
)
Disc number/Track
number/Elapsed time display
Display scroll (MP3 compatible type)
Only 12 characters can be displayed at
one time. To display the rest of the
characters of a long title, turn the display
Disc tray number
Track name display*
Album name display*
feed dial (
) to the right. Hidden
titles can be scrolled into the display one
character at a time.
Artist name display*
NOTE
*Depending on the CD, this information
may not be available.
The displayable number of characters is
limited. If the number of characters, including
the file extension (.mp3), exceeds 32
characters, it may not be fully displayed.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page264
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (264,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Message display
If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
qOperating the Auxiliary jack
You can connect portable audio units or
similar products on the market to the
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio
over the vehicle's speakers, refer to
Auxiliary Input (page 6-54).
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page265
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (265,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
qError Indications
If you see an error indication on the display, find the cause in the chart. If you cannot clear
the error indication, take the vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication
Cause
Solution
Depending on the
surrounding conditions
(such as large trees, build-
ings, or tunnels) and special
weather conditions,
SIRIUS radio reception
may be diminished or
temporarily interrupted.
Improve reception by moving away from possible
obstructions. If the error indication continues to display,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
ACQUIRING
Check the satellite radio antenna, antenna cable and
DLP antenna connector. If the error indication continues
to display, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Satellite radio antenna
malfunction
ANTENNA FAIL
CHECK CD
Insert the CD properly. If the error indication continues
to display, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CD is inserted upside down
CD is defective
Insert another CD properly. If the error indication
continues to display, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
NOTE
If a broken DLP* unit is replaced with a new unit, cancel the license for the broken unit and make
sure to carry out new registration for the replaced unit. If the license for the broken unit is not
canceled, you will be charged a reception fee for both units.
* DLP: Down Link Processor (SATELLITE RADIO Module)
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page266
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (266,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
With Bluetooth Hands-Free only/
Bluetooth Hands-Free and navigation
system
Use the voice recognition/hands-free
switch for navigation system sound
operation.
For details, refer to the separate manual
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM Owner's
Manual”.
Audio Control Switch
Operation
When the audio unit is turned on,
operation of the audio unit from the
steering wheel is possible.
NOTE
Because the audio unit will be turned off under
the following conditions, the switches will be
inoperable.
l
When the ignition switch is turned to the
LOCK position.
l
When the power button on the audio unit is
pressed and the audio unit is turned off.
l
When the CD being played is ejected and
the audio unit is turned off.
Without Bluetooth Hands-Free and
navigation system
Voice recognition/hands
free switch
-
NOTE
l
The voice recognition/hands-free switch is
operable with the audio unit turned off.
l
Mazda has installed this system to prevent
distraction while driving the vehicle and
using audio controls on the dashboard.
Always make safe driving your first priority.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page267
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (267,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
NOTE
qAdjusting the Volume
CD, CD changer, and SIRIUS digital satellite
radio modes cannot be selected in the
following cases:
To increase the volume, pull up the
volume switch.
· CD, CD changer, or SIRIUS digital satellite
radio unit is not equipped on the audio
system.
To decrease the volume, press down the
volume switch.
· CD has not been inserted.
· With the SIRIUS digital satellite radio, the
mode which was selected last is displayed.
Connect a portable audio unit or similar
product on the market to the auxiliary jack to
listen to music or audio over the vehicle's
speakers. Change the audio source to AUX
mode (page 6-54).
qSeek Switch
qChanging the Source
Press the mode switch (
) to change
the audio source (FM1 radio → FM2
radio → AM radio → CD player or CD
changer → SIRIUS1 → SIRIUS2 →
SIRIUS3 → AUX → cyclical).
When listening to the radio or SIRIUS
digital satellite radio
Pull up or press down the seek switch, the
radio switches to the next/previous stored
station in the order that it was stored
(1―6).
Pull up or press down the seek switch for
about 2 seconds until a beep sound is
heard to seek all usable stations at a
higher or lower frequency whether
programmed or not.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page268
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (268,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
When playing a CD
AUX Mode (Auxiliary input)
Pull up the seek switch to skip to the next
track.
Press down the seek switch to repeat the
current track.
Pull up or press down and hold the seek
switch to continuously switch the tracks
up or down.
You can connect portable audio units or
similar products on the market to the
auxiliary jack to listen to music or audio
over the vehicle's speakers.
qMute Switchí
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute
audio, press it again to resume audio
output.
WARNING
Do not adjust the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving the
vehicle:
Adjusting the portable audio unit or
a similar product while driving the
vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to
a serious accident. Always adjust the
portable audio unit or a similar
product while the vehicle is stopped.
Do not allow the connection plug cord
to get tangled with the parking brake
or the shift lever:
Allowing the plug cord to become
tangled with the parking brake or
the shift lever is dangerous as it
could interfere with driving, resulting
in an accident.
6-54
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page269
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (269,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
To listen to a portable audio unit
CAUTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
Ø Close the cover when the auxiliary
jack is not in use to prevent
foreign objects and liquids from
penetrating the auxiliary jack.
Ø Do not place objects or apply force
to the auxiliary jack with the plug
connected.
2. Insert the connection plug into the
auxiliary jack.
3. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
Ø Noise may occur during playback
if the accessory socket equipped
on the vehicle is used. (If noise
occurs, do not use the accessory
socket.)
4. Press the source change button
(
) of the audio unit or the mode
) of the audio control
switch (
switches on the steering wheel to
change to the AUX mode.
NOTE
Audio Unit
Audio Control
Switches
l
Before using the auxiliary jack, read the
manufacturer's instructions for the product
being connected.
l
Use a commercially-available, non-
impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for
connecting the portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliary
jack, read the manufacture's instructions
for connecting a portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
l
To prevent discharging of the battery, do
not use the auxiliary input for long periods
with the engine off or idling.
NOTE
l
Set the volume of the portable audio unit to
the maximum within the range that the
sound does not become distorted, then
adjust the volume using the power/volume
dial of the audio unit or the volume switch
l
l
Noise may occur depending on the product
connected to the auxiliary jack.
With regard to connecting a portable audio
or similar device to a power source, use the
battery for the device, not the accessory
socket.
(
,
) of the audio control switch.
l
l
Use your portable audio unit for operations
other than volume adjustment.
If the connection plug is pulled out from the
auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise
may occur.
l
l
l
Insert the plug to the auxiliary jack
securely.
Insert or remove the plug with the plug
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack hole.
Insert or remove the plug by holding its
base.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page270
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (270,1)
Interior Comfort
Audio System
Safety Certification
This CD player is made and tested to meet exacting safety standards. It meets FCC
requirements and complies with safety performance standards of the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services.
CAUTION
Ø This CD player should not be adjusted or repaired by anyone except qualified
service personnel.
If servicing is required, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified herein may result in hazardous laser exposure. Never operate the CD
player with the top case of the unit removed.
Ø Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
NOTE
For CD player section:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page271
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (271,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Bluetooth Hands-Freeí
CAUTION
The types of mobile phones which
can be connected to the hands-free
unit are limited, so before purchasing
or changing your mobile phone
model, consult Mazda Bluetooth
Hands-Free Customer Service or visit
www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth for a
complete list of compatible phones.
Mobile phones which can be
qWhat is Bluetooth Hands-Free?
Bluetooth Hands-Free Outline
By connecting a Bluetooth equipped
mobile telephone to the hands-free unit
equipped on the vehicle, making and
receiving calls are possible using the
voice recognition/hands-free switch
located on the steering wheel, and saying
the voice commands.
connected to the hands-free system
need to be compliant with Bluetooth
specifications and the appropriate
profile, however, even among these
Bluetooth phones are some which
will not connect with your Mazda or
will have limited function. Therefore,
consult Mazda Bluetooth Hands-Free
Customer Service for information
regarding mobile phone
WARNING
Perform phonebook registration related
operations while the vehicle is parked:
Performing phonebook registration
while driving the vehicle could be a
distraction to your driving and result
in an unexpected accident. In
addition, a mistake in performing the
phonebook operation could result in
the loss of important data.
compatibility:
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/
bluetooth
Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone
Applicable Bluetooth specification
Ver. 1.1 or higher
Response profile
A Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone
communicates with the hands-free unit
equipped on the vehicle using radio
transmission (Bluetooth).
For example, if the mobile telephone is
placed in a coat pocket, the phone calls
can be made through your mobile service
without taking out and handling the
mobile telephone.
l
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
DUN (Dial-up Networking Profile)
l
Ver. 1.1
Bluetooth is the registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
íSome models.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page272
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (272,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
Voice Recognition/Hands-Free switch
operations
l
The Bluetooth Hands-Free system is
operable several seconds after turning the
ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
(requires less than 15 seconds).
If the ignition switch is turned off during a
hands-free call, the line is transferred to the
mobile telephone automatically.
A short press or a long press of the voice
recognition/hands-free switch is used to
operate the system as follows:
l
l
Short press (Press the button less than
0.7 sec.)
l
Long press (Press the button 0.7 sec. or
l
If the mobile telephone is in a location
more.)
where radio reception is difficult such as a
metal container or in the trunk, the call may
not be connected using Bluetooth. If
communication is not possible, change the
location of the mobile telephone.
Information display
When available, the information display
shows telephone numbers, Bluetooth
Hands-Free messages, and operation
status.
qComponent Parts
Bluetooth Hands-Free consists of the
following items:
l
Voice Recognition/Hands-Free switch
Information display
Microphone
Audio unit/Navigation system
l
l
l
Voice Recognition/Hands-Free switch
Bluetooth phone connected
Basic functions of Bluetooth Hands-Free
can be used for such things as making
calls or hanging up using the voice
recognition/hands-free switch on the
steering wheel.
Microphone
The microphone is used for speaking
voice commands or exchanging
conversation.
Microphone
Voice recognition/hands
-
free switch (Phone button)
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page273
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (273,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
l
Audio unit/Navigation system
Close the windows and/or the
moonroof to reduce loud noises from
outside the vehicle, or turn down the
airflow of the climate control system
while Bluetooth Hands-Free is being
used. Voice recognition may not
function correctly or voice quality may
deteriorate under the following
conditions.
The audio unit or navigation system is
used for adjusting the volume.
If Bluetooth Hands-Free is operated,
information such as mobile phone signal
strength of Bluetooth Hands-Free are
displayed on the screen. (With navigation
system)
l
A passenger is speaking.
l
Driving with the window and/or the
moonroof open.
Driving on bumpy roads.
Noise outside of the vehicle is loud.
l
l
(Construction sites, inside tunnels,
excess oncoming traffic, or heavy
rain.)
l
Operation noise from turn signals,
wipers, or the horn is heard.
A/C airflow is strong or wind is
l
Bluetooth Hands-Free information
blowing on the microphone.
There is noise coming from cargo
l
qVoice
loaded in the vehicle.
Voice commands may not be
l
To prevent the deterioration in voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points must be observed:
recognized depending on the voice. If
the voice commands are not recognized
correctly, repeat the commands in a
louder voice, at a natural pace, as if
speaking to another person.
Dialects or different wording other than
hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specified by the voice
commands.
l
It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
l
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory, refer to “Voice Recognition
Learning Function (Speaker Enrollment)”
(page 6-74).
Please be aware that the voice recognition
may error despite following the above
points.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page274
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (274,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
qFunction Restrictions While
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
Using Bluetooth Hands-Free
Some functions are limited while
Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used. They
include:
l
Beep sound and voice guidance related
to the audio unit and navigation system
are not heard.
Beep sound related to the A/C
operation is not heard.
The navigation system's voice
recognition command does not
function.
The hands-free system is activated.
Functions of the hands-free telephone,
such as making and receiving calls, can be
used after the activation. (For details on
the telephone functions, refer to “Basic
Bluetooth Hands-Free Operation” or
“Convenient Use of the Hands-Free
System”.)
l
l
NOTE
qHow to Use This Section
For vehicles with a navigation system, the
system operates by speaking the voice
recognition command of the navigation system
after pressing the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press. For voice
recognition details with the navigation system,
refer to the separate “NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MANUAL”.
Descriptions in the text are as follows:
Say: Voice commands to be spoken by
you.
Prompt: Voice guidance output from the
speaker.
NOTE
Say voice commands after the beep sound
[Beep] is heard.
Example)
Say: [Beep] “Dial”
Prompt: “Number, please”
Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”
Bluetooth Hands-Free Activation
Method
1. Program the mobile telephone (Pairing)
Refer to Bluetooth Hands-Free
preparation on page 6-61.
2. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page275
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (275,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
4. Say: [Beep] “Language”
Basic Bluetooth Hands-
Free Operation
5. Prompt: “Select a language: English,
French, or Spanish.”
q
Bluetooth Hands-Free Preparation
6. Say: [Beep] “French” (Speak the
desired language: “English”, “French”
or “Spanish”)
Language setting
The available languages are English,
Spanish, and Canadian French. If the
language setting is changed, all of the
voice guidance and voice input
commands are done in the selected
language.
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying the name
of the language in the native pronunciation.
7. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
NOTE
selected. Is this correct?”
l
If the language setting is changed, phone
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
registration is maintained.
Phonebook records are not cleared, but
each language has a separate phonebook.
Therefore, entries created in one language
will need to be re-entered in the phonebook
of the new language.
9. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected, returning to main menu”
(Spoken in the newly selected
language).
Method 2
l
Do these steps before you start driving.
These less used functions are too
distracting to undertake while driving until
you are fully familiar with the system.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
Method 1
NOTE
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
NOTE
2. Say: [Beep] “French” (Say the desired
language: “English”, “French”, or
“Spanish”.)
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying the name
of the language in the native pronunciation.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode, or
say “cancel” to return to the main
menu.”
3. Prompt: “Would you like to change
the language to French (Desired
language) ?”
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page276
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (276,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
4. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode, or
say “cancel” to return to the main
menu.”
5. Prompt: “Please wait. Switching to
French phone book. French selected,
returning to main menu” (Spoken in
the newly selected language).
5. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
Mobile telephone programming
(Pairing)
6. Prompt: “Do you want to pair a
phone, delete a phone, or list paired
phones?”
To use Bluetooth Hands-Free, a mobile
phone equipped with Bluetooth has to be
programmed to the hands-free unit using
the following procedure.
Up to seven Bluetooth equipped mobile
telephones can be programmed to the
vehicle.
7. Say: [Beep] “Pair a phone”
8. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit pairing
code.”
9. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Speak an
arbitrary 4-digit pairing code. This can
be any combination of 4 numbers.)
NOTE
l
A mobile telephone can be programmed
only when the vehicle is parked. If the
vehicle starts to move, the pairing
NOTE
l
Some devices accept only a particular
procedure will end. Programming is
dangerous while driving - pair up your
device before you start driving. Park the
car in a safe place before programming.
Since the communication range of a
Bluetooth equipped mobile telephone is
about 10 meters (32 ft), if a mobile
pairing code (Usually, “0000” or “1234”).
If pairing cannot be completed, refer to the
owner's manual of your mobile device, and
try those numbers if necessary.
Record the code as it will be used to
program your phone in Step 16.
l
l
telephone is placed within a 10-meter (32
ft) radius of the vehicle, it may be detected/
programmed unintentionally while another
telephone is being programmed.
10. Prompt: “Pairing code XXXX (4-
digit number). Is this correct?”
11. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
12. If “Yes”, go to Step 13.
1. Activate the Bluetooth application of
the mobile telephone.
If “No”, the procedure returns to Step
8.
NOTE
13. Prompt: “Start pairing procedure on
phone. See phone's manual for
instructions.”
For the operation of the mobile telephone,
refer to its instruction manual.
2. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
14. Using the mobile telephone, perform
a search for the Bluetooth device
(Peripheral device).
3. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page277
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (277,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
23. Prompt: “XXXXXX - - - (Ex.
“Stan's phone”) (Phone tag) set to
priority X (Priority number). Is this
correct?”
For the operation of the mobile telephone,
refer to its instruction manual.
15. Select “Mazda” from the device list
24. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
searched by the mobile phone.
25. Prompt: “Pairing complete”
16. Input the 4-digit pairing code set in
Step 9 to the mobile telephone.
After a mobile telephone is registered, the
system automatically identifies the phone.
By pressing the voice recognition/hands-
free switch again, or by pressing the voice
recognition/hands-free switch first after
turning the ignition switch from the
LOCK to the ACC position, the system
reads out a voice guidance, “XXXXXX -
- - (Ex. “Stan's phone”) (Phone tag) is
connected”. If two or more telephones are
registered, the one with the highest
priority is selected.
17. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
phone after the beep.”
18. Say: [Beep] “XXXX - - -” (Speak a
“phone tag”, an arbitrary name for the
phone.)
Example: “Stan's phone.”
NOTE
Speak a programmed “phone tag” within 10
seconds.
If more than two mobile telephones are to be
programmed, they cannot be programmed with
the same or similar “phone tag”.
NOTE
Depending on the device, the registration
status may be lost after a certain period of
time. If this occurs, repeat the entire process
from Step 1.
19. Prompt: “Adding XXXXXX - - -
(Ex. “Stan's phone”) (Phone tag). Is
this correct?”
20. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
qMaking a Call Using a Telephone
Number
21. Prompt: “Assign a priority for this
phone between 1 and 7, where 1 is
the phone used most often.”
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confident you can do it while driving in a non-
taxing road situation. If you are not completely
comfortable, make all calls from a safe
parking position, and move out only when fully
under control and you can devote your eyes
and mind to driving.
22. Say: [Beep] “1” (Speak a number of
the desired priority from 1 to 7.)
NOTE
l
Normally, “1” is to be input (Highest
priority).
l
If more than two mobile telephones are
registered, input the priority order from 1 to
7.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page278
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (278,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
qHanging Up a Call
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the call with a long press.
A beep sound will confirm that call is
ended.
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
qVolume Adjustment
The power/volume dial of the audio unit
or navigation system is used to adjust the
volume. Turn the dial to the right to
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
increase volume, to the left to decrease it.
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
Audio unit
Navigation system
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-1234”) (Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “Dialing XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “555-1234”) (Telephone number)
is this correct?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
7. When “Yes” is spoken, the call is
made.
When “No” is spoken, the procedure
returns to Step 3.
NOTE
NOTE
l
The volume can also be adjusted using the
volume button on the steering wheel.
The “Dial” command and a telephone number
can be combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Dial 123-4567”, then,
Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
l
The music volume of the audio unit and the
navigation system cannot be adjusted while
Bluetooth Hands-Free is being used.
qReceiving an Incoming Call
qHelp Function Use
1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press the
The help function informs the user of all
the available voice commands under the
current conditions.
phone button to answer”.
2. To accept the call, press the voice
recognition/hands-free switch with a
short press.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
To reject the call, press the voice
recognition/hands-free switch with a
long press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Help”
3. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance
instructions.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page279
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (279,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
10. Say: [Beep] “Mobile” (Say “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Pager”, for the
desired location to be registered.)
Convenient Use of the
Hands-Free System
11. Prompt: “Mobile” (Location to be
qPhone Book Usage
registered). Is this correct?
Phone book registration
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
Phone numbers can be registered to the
Bluetooth Hands-Free phone book.
13. Prompt: “Number, please.”
14. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “555-1234”)” (Say the phone
number to be registered.)
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
15. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-1234”) (Phone number
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
registration). Is this correct? ”
16. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
17. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to add another number for this
entry?”
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
18. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
19. If “Yes”, an additional phone number
registration can be made for the same
entry.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
If “No”, the procedure proceeds to
Step 20.
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
20. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
Making calls using the phone book
4. Say: [Beep] “New entry”
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the name of a person (voice tag) whose
phone number has been registered in
Bluetooth Hands-Free in advance.
For the phone book setting method, refer
to (page 6-67).
5. Prompt: “Name please.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
7. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice
tag). Is this correct?”
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Pager?”
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page280
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (280,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
qEmergency Calls
A call can be made to the emergency
phone number (911) using the voice input
command.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phone book.)
NOTE
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phone book).
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
2. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
3. Prompt: “Calling “911”, is this
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
correct?”
NOTE
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
The “Call” command and the voice tag can be
combined.
5. Prompt: “Dialing”
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Call John's phone”, then,
Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
qRefusing an Incoming Call
For incoming call refusal, refer to
qRedialing Function
Redialing the number of the person
previously dialed using the phone is
possible.
qMute
The microphone can be muted during a
call.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute”
3. Prompt: “Microphone muted”
Canceling mute
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page281
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (281,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute off”
NOTE
l
To refuse an incoming call, press the voice
recognition/hands-free switch with a long
press.
After receiving a new incoming call, the
previous call is placed on hold.
3. Prompt: “Microphone unmuted”
qTransferring a Call
l
Transferring a call from Hands-Free to
a mobile phone
Switching calls
Communication between the hands-free
unit and a mobile phone is canceled, and
the line can be switched to a standard call
using a mobile phone.
Switching back to the previous call can
also be done.
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Ending the current call
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the call with a long press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to phone”
q
Voice Guidance Interrupt Operation
Transferring a call from a mobile
phone to Hands-Free
Voice guidance can be stopped by
pressing the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press while it is being
heard. A new voice input command can
then be spoken by the user.
Communication between mobile phones
can be switched to the Bluetooth Hands-
Free system.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
· Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
qPhone Book Settings
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to Hands
Editing phone book
Free system”
The data registered to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free phone book can be edited.
Call waiting
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
Call interrupt
A call can be switched to a new incoming
call.
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page282
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (282,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
12. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Ex. “666-1234”)” (Say the new
phone number to be registered.)
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
13. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“666-1234”) (The new phone number
to be registered). Is this correct?”
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
14. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
15. Prompt: “Number changed. Would
you like to call this number, edit
another entry..., or say “cancel” to
return to main menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
Phone book data deletion
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to edit, or say
“List names”..., or say “cancel” to
return to main menu.”
Erasing individual phone book data
Individual data registered to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free phone book can be cleared.
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say the voice tag for the
registered name to be edited in the
phone book.)
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
7. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
Pager?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Home” (Say the
registered location to be edited:
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
“Pager”).
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX
(Ex. “Home”) (Registered location). Is
this correct?”
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
11. Prompt: “The current number is
XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex. “555-1234”)
(Currently registered number). New
number, please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
NOTE
If there was no previous phone number
registered to a location (Ex. “Work”), the
prompt will only read out “Number, please”.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page283
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (283,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to delete, or say
“List names”..., or say “cancel” to
return to main menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Erase all”
5. Prompt: “Are you sure you want to
erase everything from your Hands Free
system phone book?”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say the registered voice tag
to be deleted from the phone book.)
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “You are about to delete
everything from your Hands Free
system phone book. Do you want to
continue?”
7. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)
Home (Registered location). Is this
correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please wait, erasing the
Hands Free system phone book.”
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) Home
(Registered location) deleted, returning
to main menu.”
10. Prompt: “Hands-Free system phone
book erased, returning to main
menu.”
Complete deletion of the phone book
data
Read-out of names registered to the
Bluetooth Hands-Free phone book
All data registered to the Bluetooth
Hands-Free phone book can be erased.
The Bluetooth Hands-Free system can
read out the list of names registered to its
phone book.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
2. Say: [Beep] “Phone book”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
new entry, edit, list names, delete or
erase all..., or say “cancel” to return to
main menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “List names”
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page284
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (284,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
5. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone”, Mary's
phone, Bill's phone)” (Voice guidance
reads out the voice tags registered to
the phone book.)
Hands-Free Telephone Setting
qMobile Phone
Mobile phone registration
For the registration of a Bluetooth
equipped mobile telephone to Bluetooth
Hands-Free, refer to “Bluetooth Hands-
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the read-out at the desired
name, and then say one of the following
voice commands to execute it.
l
“Continue”: Continues the voice
Registered mobile phone read-out
guidance.
“Call”: Calls the registered phone
Bluetooth Hands-Free can read-out the
mobile phones registered to its system.
l
number.
l
“Edit”: Edits the registered phone
NOTE
number.
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
l
“Delete”: Deletes the registered phone
number.
l
“Previous”: Returns to the previous
phone number.
“Cancel”: Returns to main menu.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
l
6. Prompt: “End of list, would you like
to start from the beginning?”
NOTE
7. Say: [Beep] “No”
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
8. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Do you want to pair a
phone, delete a phone, or list paired
phones?”
6. Say: [Beep] “List phones”
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page285
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (285,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
7. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. Phone A, phone B,
phone C)” (The voice guidance reads
out the phone tags registered to the
hands-free system.)
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch during the read-out at the desired
phone, and then say one of the following
voice commands to execute it.
4. Say: [Beep] “Select phone”
5. Prompt: “Please say 1 (priority 1) for
XXXXX... (Ex. phone A), 2 (priority
2) for XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)”
l
“Select”: Programmed the mobile
phone when the voice recognition/
hands-free switch was pressed.
“Continue”: Continues the voice
6. Say: [Beep] “2” (Say the priority
number for the mobile phone to be
used as first priority.)
l
guidance.
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)
(Registered phone tag) selected, is this
correct?”
l
“Delete”: Deletes the registered mobile
phone.
“Previous”: Returns to the previous
l
mobile phone.
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
8. Prompt: “End of list, would you like
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)
(Phone tag) will temporarily override
phone priorities, returning to main
menu.”
to start from the beginning?”
9. Say: [Beep] “No”
10. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
Mobile phone selection
Registered mobile phone deletion
Registered mobile phones can be deleted
individually or collectively.
This function is for switching to a
different mobile phone which has been
registered beforehand. The selected
mobile phone will remain in effect until
the ignition switch is turned off.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
NOTE
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page286
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (286,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
Passcode setting
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
NOTE
5. Prompt: “Do you want to pair a
phone, delete a phone, or list paired
phones?”
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
NOTE
A registered mobile phone can be deleted
using the registration list.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
6. Say: [Beep] “Delete phone”
7. Prompt: “Please say 1 (priority 1) for
XXXXX... (Ex. phone A), 2 (priority
2) for XXXXX... (Ex. phone B...)”
(The voice guidance reads out each
phone in the order of priority and the
phone tag).
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled. Would
you like to enable it?”
8. Say: [Beep] “2” (Say the order of
priority of the mobile phone to be
deleted.)
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Please say a 4-digit passcode.
Remember this passcode. It will be
required to use this system.”
NOTE
Say “All” to delete all mobile phones.
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say a desired 4-
9. Prompt: “Removing XXXXX... (Ex.
phone B...) (Registered phone tag). Is
this correct?”
digit passcode, “PCode”.)
9. Prompt:“Passcode XXXX (Passcode,
PCode). Is this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Deleted”
11. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled,
returning to main menu.”
qSecurity Setting
Using Bluetooth Hands-Free with a
passcode
If a passcode is set, the system cannot be
activated unless the passcode is input.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page287
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (287,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
NOTE
5. Prompt:“Passcode is enabled. Would
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
you like to disable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Passcode is disabled,
returning to main menu.”
2. Prompt:“Hands-Free system is locked.
Confirmation Prompts
State the passcode to continue.”
The confirmation prompt confirms the
command content to the user before
advancing to the operation requested by
the user. When this function is turned on,
the system reads out the voice input
command previously received and
confirms whether the command is correct
before advancing to the command
execution.
3. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say the set
passcode “PCode”.)
4. If the correct passcode is input, voice
guidance “XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Phone tag) is connected” is
announced.
If the passcode is incorrect, voice
guidance “XXXX (4-digit passcode,
Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try
again” is announced.
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned on:
(Ex. “Calling John's phone. Is this
correct?”)
When the confirmation prompt function is
turned off:
Canceling the passcode
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is too
distracting to attempt while driving and you
may make too many errors to be effective.
(Ex. “Calling John's phone.”)
NOTE
If the confirmation prompt function is turned
off when making an emergency call, the system
reads out and confirms the command before
executing it.
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
NOTE
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page288
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (288,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
3. Prompt:“Select one of the following:
pairing options, confirmation prompts,
select phone, language, or passcode...,
or say “cancel” to return to main
menu.”
NOTE
For vehicles with the navigation system, you
can also press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press and say: [Beep]
“Telephone” or “Phone”.
4. Say: [Beep] “Confirmation prompts”
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
5. Prompt:“Confirmation prompts are
on/off. Would you like to turn
3. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the phone
button when you are ready to begin.
Press and hold the phone button to
cancel at any time.”
confirmation prompts off/on?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt:“Confirmation prompts are
off/on, returning to main menu.”
qVoice Recognition Learning
4. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
Function (Speaker Enrollment)
The voice recognition learning function
enables voice recognition appropriate to
the characteristics of the user's voice.
If the recognition of the voice input
commands to the system is not adequate,
this function can largely improve the
system's voice recognition of the user. If
your voice can be recognized sufficiently
without using this function, you may not
realize the added benefit of the function.
To register your voice, the voice input
command list must be read out. Read out
the list when the vehicle is parked.
Perform the registration in as quiet a place
as possible (page 6-59).
5. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
6. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say the
voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
7. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete, returning to main menu.”
Voice input command list for voice
recognition learning
The registration must be performed
completely. The required time is a few
minutes. The user needs to be seated in
the driver's seat with the voice input
command list for voice recognition
learning open to the page indicated below.
When reading out, the following points
must be observed:
l
Read out the numbers one at a time
correctly and naturally.
(For example, “1234” must be read out
“one, two, three, four”, not “twelve, thirty
four”.)
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press (without
navigation system) or a long press
(with navigation system).
l
Do not read out parentheses. “ (” and
hyphens “-” are used for separating
numbers in a phone number.
Ex.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page289
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:33 AM
Black plate (289,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
“ (888) 555-1212” must be spoken “Eight,
eight, eight, five, five, five, one, two, one,
two.”
When Bluetooth Hands-
Free cannot be used
Phrase
Command
0123456789
Bluetooth Hands-Free cannot be used
under the following conditions:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(888) 555-1212
Call
l
The mobile telephone is outside of the
communication area.
The mobile telephone has a
Dial
l
Setup
malfunction.
The mobile telephone is not connected
Cancel
Continue
Help
l
to the hands-free unit equipped on the
vehicle.
The mobile telephone battery is weak.
The mobile telephone is turned off.
The mobile telephone is placed where
l
NOTE
l
After user voice registration is completed,
voice guidance “Speaker enrollment is
complete, returning to main menu” is
announced.
l
radio reception is difficult.
qDTMF (Dual Tone Multi-
Frequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting
DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver
of a DTMF transmission is generally a
home telephone answering machine or a
company's automated guidance call center
(When you send tone signals back
according to the voice guidance
recording).
1. Press the voice recognition/hands-free
switch with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “XXXX... send” (Say
DTMF code)
3. Prompt: “Sending XXXX... (DTMF
code)”
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page290
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (290,1)
Interior Comfort
Bluetooth Hands-Free
Safety Certification
Mazda Bluetooth Hands-
Free Customer Service
FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC07 IC:279B-
MBLUEC07
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
For toll-free Bluetooth Hands-Free
customer service call 800-430-0153 or go
to www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth for
assistance.
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
The term “IC: ” before the radio
certification number only signifies that
Industry Canada technical specifications
were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter. End-users and installers must
be provided with installation instructions
and transmitter operating conditions for
satisfying RF exposure compliance.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page291
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (291,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Sunvisors
Interior Lights
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for
use in front or swing it to the side.
qIlluminated Entry System
When the illuminated entry system
operates, the overhead light (switch is in
the DOOR position) and the courtesy
lights turn on for:
Sunvisor
l
About 30 seconds after the driver's
door is unlocked and the ignition
switch is in the LOCK position (with
the ignition key removed).
l
About 15 seconds after all doors are
closed.
(With Advanced key)
About 5 seconds after all doors are
closed when the advanced key is
outside of the vehicle.
qVanity Mirrors
l
About 15 seconds after the ignition
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
The vanity mirror light will illuminate
when you open the cover.
switch is in the LOCK position (with
the ignition key removed) with all
doors closed.
The light also turns off when:
l
The ignition switch is turned to the ON
position and all doors are closed.
The driver's door is locked.
l
NOTE
Battery saver
If any door is left opened, the light turns off
after about 30 minutes to save the battery.
The light turns on again when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, or when
any door is opened after all doors have been
closed.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page292
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (292,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qOverhead Lights
qMap Lights
Front
The map lights are switched on or off by
pressing the switches.
Switch Position
Front Overhead Lights
Light off
qCourtesy Lights
l
Light is on when any door is
Turns on when any door is open or the
illuminated entry system is on.
open
l
Light is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is
on
Rear
Courtesy Light
Switch Position
Rear Overhead Lights
Light off
l
Light is on when any door is
open
l
Light is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is
on
Light on
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page293
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (293,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Information Display
Clock
Audio display
Climate control display /
Ambient temperature display
Hands-free display
qInformation Display Functions
The information display has the following functions:
l
Clock
l
Ambient Temperature Display (Outside Temperature Display)
Climate Control Display
l
l
l
Audio Display
íSome models.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page294
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (294,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
NOTE
qClock
When the :00 button is released, the seconds
will start at “00”.
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, the time is displayed.
With navigation system
Refer to the separate manual
“NAVIGATION SYSTEM”.
NOTE
Minutes and seconds are adjusted by the GPS,
however, it is necessary to adjust hours under
the following conditions:
l
Driving across different time zones
l
Daylight saving time start and end
qAmbient Temperature Display
Without navigation system
Time setting
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, press the
switch to
display the ambient temperature.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
2. Adjust the time using the time setting
buttons (
,
).
The hours advance while the time
setting button ( ) is pressed.
The minutes advance while the time
setting button ( ) is pressed.
Time resetting
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or
ON position.
2. Press and hold the :00 button for 1.5
seconds or more. The displayed time
flashes.
3. When the button is released, the time
will be reset as follows:
(Example)
12:01―12:29→12:00
12:30―12:59→1:00
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page295
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (295,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
NOTE
Lighter
l
Under the following conditions, the ambient
temperature display may differ from the
actual ambient temperature depending on
the surroundings and vehicle conditions:
The ignition switch must be in the ACC
or ON position.
1. Open the cover.
l
Significantly cold or hot temperatures.
Sudden changes in ambient temperature.
The vehicle is parked.
l
l
l
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.
l
Press the
switch for a few
seconds or more to switch the display from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade or vice versa.
(With fully automatic climate control
system)
l
Press the
switch again to switch
the display from ambient temperature to the
temperature set for the air conditioner.
qClimate Control Display
2. Press the lighter in and release it. When
ready for use, it automatically pops out.
The climate control system status is
displayed. To operate the climate control
system, refer to “Climate Control System”
(page 6-2).
qAudio Display
The audio system status is displayed. To
operate the audio system, refer to
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page296
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (296,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Ashtray
CAUTION
Do not use the ashtray for trash. You
might start a fire.
CAUTION
Ø Do not touch the metal part of the
lighter, you may burn yourself.
Ø Do not hold the lighter in because
it will overheat.
Ø Do not use the lighter socket for
plug-in accessories such as
To use, open the cover.
shavers and coffee pots. They may
damage it or cause electrical
failure. Use only a genuine Mazda
lighter or the equivalent.
Ø If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it to
prevent overheating.
To remove, open the cover and pull up the
ashtray.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page297
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (297,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qFront
Cup Holder
To use, slide the lid while pushing the
button until you hear a click sound.
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot liquids
while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups or
drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
maneuvering, occupants could be hit
and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
CAUTION
Do not use a cup holder with the lid
unlocked. During sudden braking or
maneuvering, the lid could slide
forward causing the cup contents to
spill.
CAUTION
qRear
To reduce the possibility of injury in
an accident or a sudden stop, keep
cup holders closed when not in use.
To use, pull the lid up.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page298
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (298,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
qCoin Box
Storage Compartments
To open, press the release catch down and
pull the lid downward.
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Driving with the storage boxes open
is dangerous. To reduce the
possibility of injury in an accident or
a sudden stop, keep the storage
boxes closed when driving.
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses in
the storage boxes while parked under
the sun. A lighter could explode or
the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
qGlove Box
To open the glove box, pull the latch
toward you.
Insert the key (auxiliary key*) and turn it
clockwise to lock, counterclockwise to
unlock.
qOverhead Console
This console box is designed to store
accessories. Push and release to open.
* Advanced key equipped vehicle
Unlock
Lock
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page299
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (299,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
Rear
qCenter Console
To open, pull the release catch.
Front
1. Slide the lid while pushing the button
until you hear a click sound.
CAUTION
Do not place bottles filled with fluid
(e.g. cosmetic fragrance) in the
console box. If the fluid leaks, it could
damage the electrical wiring.
2. Open the lid.
qStorage Box
The storage box is designed to store
accessories.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page300
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (300,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
To open, squeeze the latch and pull the lid
down.
Loading long objects with storage box
removed
When closing the storage box, put the
storage box back in its original position
until you hear a click sound.
The storage box can be removed for
convenient loading of long objects such as
skis placed through the trunk.
NOTE
WARNING
When using the storage box to store heavy
accessories, remove the storage box before
placing or removing the accessories.
Secure long objects in the trunk so that
they cannot be thrown forward in the
cabin and avoid sudden breaking or
maneuvering:
Insert the key (auxiliary key*) and turn it
clockwise to lock, counterclockwise to
unlock.
Sudden braking or maneuvering
while long objects are loaded
through the removed storage box
area and into the trunk is dangerous.
Operation of the shift/selector lever
could be obstructed resulting in a
serious accident.
* Advanced key equipped vehicle
Unlock
Lock
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page301
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (301,1)
Interior Comfort
Interior Equipment
NOTE
Accessory Socket
To prevent discharging of the battery, do not
use the socket for long periods with the engine
off or idling.
The accessory socket can be used
regardless of the position of the ignition
switch.
Only use genuine Mazda accessories or
the equivalent requiring no greater than
120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
The accessory socket is in the center
console.
CAUTION
To prevent accessory socket damage
or electrical failure, pay attention to
the following:
Ø Do not use accessories that require
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Ø Do not use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
Ø Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use to prevent
foreign objects and liquids from
getting into the accessory socket.
Ø Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.
Noise may occur on the audio
playback depending on the device
connected to the accessory socket.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page302
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (302,1)
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page303
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (303,1)
In Case of an Emergency
7
Helpful information on what to do in an emergency.
Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3
Kit ............................................................................................. 7-5
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page304
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (304,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning flasher and all
the turn signals will flash.
NOTE
l
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
l
Check local regulations about the use of
hazard warning lights while the vehicle is
being towed to verify that it is not in
violation of the law.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page305
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (305,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
Spare Tire and Tool Storage
Tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
Instant Mobility System (IMS) Emergency Flat Tire Repair Kit
Tool box
Jack
Lug wrench
Jack handle
Tiedown eyelet
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page306
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (306,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
The temporary spare tire is lighter and
smaller than a conventional tire, and is
designed only for emergency use and
should be used only for VERY short
periods. Temporary spare tires should
NEVER be used for long drives or
extended periods.
qJack
To remove the jack
1. Open the tool box.
WARNING
Do not install the temporary spare tire
in place of the rear wheels (driving
wheels):
Driving with the temporary spare tire
on one of the rear driving wheels is
dangerous. Especially on ice or snow.
Handling will be affected. You could
lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Move a regular tire to
the rear wheel and install the
2. Turn the jack screw counterclockwise.
temporary spare tire to the front.
To secure the jack
Perform the removal procedure in reverse.
qSpare Tire
A temporary spare tire is not equipped
with your Mazda. If an emergency tire
repair is needed, repair the flat tire with
the emergency flat tire repair kit (page
7-5). If you require a temporary spare tire,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When installing a temporary spare tire,
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
the temporary spare tire.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page307
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (307,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
Instant Mobility System
(IMS) Emergency Flat
Tire Repair Kit
CAUTION
Ø When using the temporary spare
tire, driving stability may decrease
compared to when using only the
conventional tire.
The IMS emergency flat tire repair kit
included with your Mazda is for a
temporary repair of a slightly damaged
flat tire resulting from running over nails
or similar sharp objects on the road
surface.
Drive carefully.
Ø To avoid damage to the temporary
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe
the following precautions:
Ø
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph).
NOTE
Ø
Avoid driving over obstacles.
Also, do not drive through an
automatic car wash. This tire's
diameter is smaller than a
conventional tire's, so the
ground clearance is reduced
about 25 mm (1 in).
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire.
In the event of a flat tire, use the emergency
flat tire repair kit to repair the tire temporarily.
When doing the repair, refer to the instructions
included in the emergency flat tire repair kit.
After temporarily repairing a tire with the
emergency flat tire repair kit, take your vehicle
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the tire
replaced.
Ø
Ø
Do not use a tire chain on this
tire because it won't fit
properly.
Do not use your temporary
spare tire on any other vehicle;
it has been designed only for
your Mazda.
Use only one temporary spare
tire on your vehicle at the same
time.
Ø
(With limited slip differential)
When using the temporary spare tire
on the rear axle, replace it with a
standard tire as soon as possible. The
size difference between the spare and
the standard tire will cause the
limited slip differential to
malfunction.
NOTE
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used (page 5-31).
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page308
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (308,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
l
qAbout the IMS Emergency Flat
The tire sealant cannot be reused. Purchase
new tire sealant at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The emergency flat tire repair kit cannot be
used in the following cases.
Tire Repair Kit
The IMS emergency flat tire repair kit
includes the following items.
l
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
The period of effective use for the tire
sealant has expired. (The period of
effectiveness is indicated on the bottle
label.)
The tear or puncture exceeds about
4 mm (0.16 in).
Compressor
Tire sealant
l
Injection hose
l
The damage has occurred to an area of
the tire other than the tread.
The vehicle has been driven with nearly
l
Repaired tire
sticker
Spare valve
core
Valve core
tool
no air remaining in the tire.
The tire has come off the wheel rim.
Damage to the wheel rim has occurred.
The tire has two or more punctures.
l
l
l
Instructions
qUsing the IMS Emergency Flat
Tire Repair Kit
Speed restriction
sticker
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and set the parking brake.
Case
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Reverse (R) or 1, and
turn off the engine.
WARNING
Do not allow children to touch the tire
sealant:
Ingestion of tire sealant is dangerous.
In the event tire sealant is
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
accidentally swallowed, drink large
amounts of water immediately and
seek medical assistance.
Do not allow children to touch the tire
sealant:
Tire sealant that comes into contact
with the eyes and skin is dangerous.
If tire sealant enters the eyes or
contacts the skin, flush immediately
with large amounts of water and
seek medical assistance.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page309
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (309,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
4. Unload passengers and luggage, and
remove the emergency flat tire repair
kit.
NOTE
The tire sealant can be used at outside
_
_
temperatures down to 30°C ( 22°F).
In extremely cold temperatures (0°C (32°F) or
below), the tire sealant hardens easily and
injection of the sealant will be difficult. Warm
the sealant inside the vehicle before doing the
injection work.
6. Remove the cap from the bottle. Screw
on the injection hose with the bottle's
inner cap left on to break the inner cap.
5. Shake the tire sealant well.
Injection hose
Bottle
7. Remove the valve cap from the flat
tire. Press the back of a valve core tool
to the core of the tire valve and bleed
all the remaining air.
CAUTION
Valve
If the bottle is shaken after the
injection hose is screwed on, tire
sealant could spray out from the
injection hose. Tire sealant
Valve cap
contacting clothing or other objects
may be impossible to remove. Shake
the bottle before screwing on the
injection hose.
Valve core tool
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page310
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (310,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
10. Hold the bottom of the bottle upright,
squeeze the bottle with your hands,
and inject the entire amount of tire
sealant into the tire.
CAUTION
If there is air remaining in the tire
when the valve core is removed, the
valve core could fly out. Remove the
valve core carefully.
8. Turn the valve core counterclockwise
with the valve core tool and remove the
valve core.
Valve
Valve core
Valve
NOTE
The tire sealant cannot be reused. Purchase a
new tire sealant kit at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
11. Pull out the injection hose from the
valve. Reinsert the valve core into the
valve and turn it clockwise to install
it.
NOTE
Store the valve core in a place where it won't
get dirty.
12. Attach the sticker that indicates
completion of the tire repair on a flat
outer surface of the repaired tire.
9. Remove the plug from the injection
hose and insert the injection hose into
the valve.
Plug
Injection hose
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page311
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (311,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
14. Install the compressor hose to the tire
valve.
Do not throw away the empty tire sealant
bottle after use. Return the empty tire sealant
bottle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer when
replacing the tire. The empty tire sealant bottle
will need to be used to extract and dispose of
the used sealant from the tire.
Valve
Compressor hose
13. Attach the vehicle speed restriction
sticker in a place where the driver can
easily see it.
15. Insert the compressor plug into the
interior accessory socket and turn the
ignition switch to the ACC position
(page 6-87).
Compressor
plug
Compressor
WARNING
Do not attach the vehicle speed
restriction sticker to the instrument
panel, as it would obstruct vision of
areas such as warning light indicators
or the speedometer:
Center console
Attaching the vehicle speed
restriction sticker to the steering
wheel pad is dangerous. The sticker
could interfere with air bag inflation
and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Ø Before pulling out the compressor
plug from the electrical socket,
make sure the compressor power
switch is off.
Ø The compressor turns on and off
with the push-button switch.
16. Turn the compressor switch on and
inflate the tire carefully to the correct
inflation pressure.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page312
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (312,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
18. Install the tire valve cap.
WARNING
19. Put the emergency flat tire repair kit
in the trunk and continue driving.
Never operate the compressor above
300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 3 bar, 43.5 psi):
Operating the compressor above 300
kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 3 bar, 43.5 psi) is
dangerous. When the inflation
pressure rises above 300 kPa (3.1
kgf/cm2, 3 bar, 43.5 psi), heated air
will be exhausted from the back of
the compressor and you could be
burned.
CAUTION
Ø Drive carefully to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer and keep the
vehicle speed below 80 km/h (50
mph).
Ø If the vehicle is driven 80 km/h (50
mph) or higher, the vehicle might
begin to vibrate.
CAUTION
If the compressor operates slowly or
becomes hot, it indicates
overheating. Turn the compressor off
immediately and leave it turned off
for 30 minutes or longer.
NOTE
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
If the tire is not properly inflated, the tire
pressure monitoring system warning light will
illuminate (page 5-31).
20. After driving the vehicle for 10
minutes or 5 km (3 miles), check the
tire pressure with the tire pressure
gauge equipped with the compressor.
If the tire pressure has fallen below
the correct tire pressure, inflate the
tire to the correct pressure again
following the steps from number 15.
NOTE
l
Check the tire inflation pressure label (rear
door on the driver's side) for the correct tire
inflation pressure.
l
Do not use the compressor for longer than
10 minutes because using the compressor
for long periods could damage it.
l
If the tire does not inflate, repair of the tire
may not be possible. If the tire does not
reach the correct inflation pressure within a
10-minute period, it probably has received
more extensive damage. When this happens,
the emergency flat tire repair kit cannot be
used to repair the tire. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the tire has been over-inflated, loosen the
screw cap on the compressor and bleed
some of the air out.
CAUTION
Ø If the tire inflation pressure falls
below 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar,
18.9 psi), repair cannot be done
with the repair kit. Park the
vehicle on a level surface off the
right-of-way and contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø If the tire inflation pressure
continues to remain low after
repeating steps 14 to 21, park the
vehicle on a level surface off the
right-of-way and contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
l
17. When the tire has been inflated to the
proper inflation pressure, turn the
compressor switch off and remove the
compressor hose from the tire valve.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page313
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (313,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
Changing the Tire
When checking the tire inflation pressure with
the tire pressure gauge on the compressor unit,
make sure the compressor switch is turned off.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire, and never get under a
vehicle that is supported only by a jack:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure
21. If the tire inflation pressure remains
stable, the tire repair is complete.
Drive the vehicle with care to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the
tire replaced.
someone.
CAUTION
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Ø A tire that has been temporarily
repaired with the tire sealant
cannot be reused. Mazda
recommends replacing the tire
with a new one.
Ø The wheel can be reused after any
sealant adhering to it is wiped off
and carefully inspected. However,
replace the tire valve with a new
one.
Allowing someone to remain in a
vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
CAUTION
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
The wheels equipped on your Mazda
are specially designed for installation
of the tire pressure sensors. Do not
use non-genuine wheels, otherwise it
may not be possible to install the tire
pressure sensors.
qInspecting the IMS Emergency
Flat Tire Repair Kit
Inspect the emergency tire repair kit at
regular intervals.
l
Check the tire sealant period of
effective use.
Check the operation of the tire
l
NOTE
l
Make sure the jack is well lubricated before
compressor.
using it.
NOTE
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
The tire sealant has a period of effective use.
Check the period of effective use indicated on
the bottle label and do not use it if it has
expired. Have the tire sealant replaced at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer before the period of
effective use has expired.
l
Be sure to register the tire pressure sensor
ID signal code whenever tires or wheels are
changed (page 5-33).
1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-
way and firmly set the parking brake.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in Park (P), a manual
transmission in Reverse (R) or 1, and
turn off the engine.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page314
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (314,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
qRemoving the Tire
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traffic.
1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any until the tire has been
raised off the ground.
5. Remove the jack, and tool (page 7-3).
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the tire to be changed. When blocking
a wheel, place a tire block both in front
and behind the tire.
2. Place the jack under the jacking
position closest to the tire being
changed.
NOTE
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocks
of sufficient size if possible to hold the tire in
place.
Jacking position
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page315
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (315,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise and
WARNING
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is firmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle in
positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even
kill someone. Use only the front and
rear jacking positions recommended
in this manual.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
5. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise, then remove the
wheel.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
3. Insert the jack handle into the jack.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page316
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (316,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
qLocking Lug Nutsí
To install the nut
1. Place the key on top of the nut, and be
sure to hold the key square to it. If you
hold the key at an angle, you may
damage both key and nut. Don't use a
power impact wrench.
If your vehicle has optional antitheft
wheel lug nuts, one on each wheel will
lock the tires and you must use a special
key to unlock them. This key is attached
to the lug wrench and is stored with the
spare tire. Register them with the lock
manufacturer by filling out the card
provided in the glove box and mailing it
in the accompanying envelope. If you lose
this key, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer or use the lock manufacturer's
order form, which is with the registration
card.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the key,
apply pressure, and turn it clockwise.
qMounting the Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
Antitheft lug nut
Special key
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the key for the antitheft lug nut.
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off, resulting in
an accident.
2. Place the key on top of the nut, and be
sure to hold the key square to it. If you
hold the key at an angle, you may
damage both key and nut. Don't use a
power impact wrench.
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
2. Mount the tire.
7-14
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page317
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (317,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
If you're unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Nut tightening torque
88―118
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)
(9―12, 65―87)
WARNING
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off. This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the lug
nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same configuration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the
stud, which could cause the wheel to
slip off and cause an accident.
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts
could loosen while driving and cause
the tire to come off, resulting in an
accident. In addition, lug nuts and
bolts could be damaged if tightened
more than necessary.
5. Check the inflation pressure. Refer to
the specification charts on page 10-6.
4. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order
shown.
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could affect
handling and result in an accident.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page318
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (318,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Flat Tire
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling, store
them properly.
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
A tire pressure sensor is not installed to the
temporary spare tire. The warning light will
flash continuously while the temporary spare
tire is being used (page 5-31).
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page319
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (319,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Overheating
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating:
Overheating
If the temperature gauge indicates
overheating, the vehicle loses power, or
you hear a loud knocking or pinging
noise, the engine is probably too hot.
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transmission in park (P), a manual
transmission in neutral.
WARNING
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
Turn off the ignition switch and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from under the hood or from
the engine compartment.
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Don't go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
If neither coolant nor steam is
escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
Do not remove the cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
it cools.
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
CAUTION
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the
engine temperature will increase.
Stop the engine and call an
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
NOTE
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it's low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
Once the engine coolant exceeds a preset
temperature, an electrical cooling fan turns
on. It will continue running for about 10
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to
off.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page320
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (320,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Overheating
If you find a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If you find no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the
cooling system inspected. The engine
could be seriously damaged unless
repairs are made. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page321
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (321,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Starting a Flooded Engine
If the engine does not start the first time,
perform the following procedure to start
the engine.
1. While the accelerator pedal is fully
depressed, turn the ignition switch to
the START position and crank the
engine for about 7 to 8 seconds.
2. Release the ignition switch and
accelerator pedal.
3. Start the engine as normally without
depressing the accelerator.
l
The fuel injection is cut by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal.
If the engine starts during Step 1, the
l
engine will rev up. Release the ignition
switch and accelerator pedal
immediately.
l
Avoid racing the engine or driving the
vehicle right after starting the engine.
Do not hold the ignition switch in the
l
START position for over 10 seconds. It
may damage the starter and drain the
battery.
l
If the engine still does not start using
the above procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page322
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (322,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Follow These Precautions Carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery
fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with water for 15
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that
could cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a
battery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative (
terminal of the battery.
)
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page323
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (323,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It may
rupture or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.
The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and
other electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in
series or a 24 V motor generator set).
1. Remove the engine cover.
2. Remove the rubber hose from the
battery cover.
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page324
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (324,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
l
3. Remove the battery cover from its rear
side.
Connect the other end to a solid,
stationary, exposed metallic point
(for example, the tightening bolt)
away from the discharged battery
(4).
Connect cables
in numerical
order and
Discharged
battery
disconnect in
reverse order.
4. Make sure the booster battery is 12 V
and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
Booster battery
7. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
5. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, don't allow the vehicles to
touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and all
unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
8. When finished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
Step 6.
6. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
NOTE
Verify that the engine cover is securely
installed.
l
Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
Attach the other end to the positive
l
terminal on the booster battery (2).
Connect one end of the other cable
l
to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3).
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page325
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (325,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Starting
Push-Starting
Do not push-start your Mazda.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be
injured.
CAUTION
Do not push-start a vehicle that has
a manual transmission. It can
damage the emission control system.
NOTE
You can't start a vehicle with an automatic
transmission by pushing it.
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page326
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (326,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Towing Description
CAUTION
Do not tow the vehicle pointed
forward with driving wheels on the
ground. This may cause internal
damage to the transmission.
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Government and local laws must be
followed.
A towed vehicle usually should have its
drive wheels (rear wheels) off the ground.
If excessive damage or other conditions
prevent this, use wheel dollies.
CAUTION
Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. This could damage your
vehicle. Use wheel-lift or flatbed
equipment.
Wheel dollies
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page327
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (327,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Rear
Tiedown Hooks
CAUTION
Do not use the front and rear
tiedown eyelets for towing the
vehicle.
The have been designed only for
securing the vehicle to a transport
vessel during shipping.
Using the eyelets for any other
purpose could result in the vehicle
being damaged.
CAUTION
qTiedown Hooks
The cap cannot be completely
removed. Do not use excessive force
as it may damage the cap or scratch
the painted bumper surface.
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug
wrench from the trunk (page 7-3).
2. Wrap the lug wrench with a soft cloth
to prevent damage to a painted bumper,
and open the cap located on the front or
rear bumper.
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet
using the lug wrench.
Front
Front
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page328
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (328,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Rear
CAUTION
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or disengage
from the bumper when tying down
the vehicle. Make sure that the
tiedown eyelet is securely tightened
to the bumper.
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown
eyelet.
Front
Rear
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page329
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (329,1)
In Case of an Emergency
Emergency Towing
Recreational Towing
An example of “recreational towing” is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transmission is not designed for
towing this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer to
carefully follow the instructions.
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page330
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (330,1)
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page332
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (332,1)
Maintenance and Care
Introduction
Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as
prescribed.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page333
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (333,1)
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
apply.
l
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).
NOTE
After the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended
intervals.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page334
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (334,1)
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 1
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
6
12
24
15
18
36
24
48
30
30
60
36
72
45
42
84
48
96
60
Maintenance Interval
12
7.5
22.5
37.5
52.5
ENGINE
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
Engine oil filter
Drive belts
COOLING SYSTEM
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,
every 2 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air filter
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
I
I
I
R
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)
Flat tire repair kit*3
Inspect annually
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page335
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (335,1)
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
6
12
24
15
18
36
24
48
30
30
60
36
72
45
42
84
48
96
60
Maintenance Interval
12
7.5
22.5
37.5
52.5
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page336
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (336,1)
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
qSchedule 2
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Puerto Rico
Others
Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
Engine oil filter
Drive belts
COOLING SYSTEM
Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after
that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years
FL22 type*1
Others
Engine coolant
Replace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,
every 2 years
Engine coolant level
FUEL SYSTEM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Air filter
R
Fuel lines and hoses*2
Hoses and tubes for emission*2
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
I
I
I
R
I
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page337
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (337,1)
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first
Months
×1000 km
×1000 miles
4
8
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
Maintenance Interval
16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections
Brake and clutch fluid level
Brake fluid
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
Disc brakes
Tire (Rotation)
Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)
Tire inflation pressure and tire wear
Flat tire repair kit*3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect annually
I
Steering operation and linkages
I
I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play
I
Manual transmission oil
Rear differential oil
R
R
I
R
R
I
Driveshaft dust boots
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body
Exhaust system and heat shields
All locks and hinges
T
T
Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
L
I
Washer fluid level
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air filter
Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding
area. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at
the recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 Check the tire repair fluid expiration date every year when performing the periodic maintenance. Replace the
tire repair fluid bottle with new one before the expiration date.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page338
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (338,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Schedule
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service
technician as soon as possible.
qWhen Refueling
l
Brake and clutch fluid level (page 8-16)
Engine coolant level (page 8-14)
Engine oil level (page 8-13)
Washer fluid level (page 8-17)
l
l
l
qAt Least Monthly
Tire inflation pressures (page 8-23)
qAt Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical
ability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
l
Engine coolant (page 8-14)
Engine oil (page 8-12)
l
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page339
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (339,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Precautions
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
qualified service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If
you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or
the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualified technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You
can be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even
more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Turn off the ignition switch and make sure the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:
After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do
not forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a
fire leading to an unexpected accident.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page340
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (340,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Once the engine coolant exceeds a preset temperature, an electrical cooling fan turns on. It will
continue running for about 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to off.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page341
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (341,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Compartment Overview
Brake/Clutch fluid
reservoir
Engine oil-filler cap
Engine oil dipstick
Windshield washer
fluid reservoir
Cooling system cap
Engine coolant reservoir
Battery
Fuse block (next
to air filter)
Fuse block
(near battery)
Air filter
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page342
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (342,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
U.S.A. and CANADA
Engine Oil
CAUTION
Do not use either synthetic or semi-
synthetic motor oil. Otherwise engine
starting performance could worsen.
NOTE
l
Changing the engine oil should be done by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(ILSAC)
l
The Mazda RX-8 requires regular checking
of the engine oil level. The compact, high
performance RENESIS rotary engine in
your vehicle consumes a small amount of
engine oil due to its structural design. An
oil pump optimizes the amount of oil
injected to lubricate the rotor seals in the
combustion cycle. Although your vehicle is
equipped with an engine oil level warning
light, it is best to keep the engine oil level in
the range between full and low by checking
the oil dipstick regularly. Mazda
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline
Engines” by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). An oil with this trademark
symbol conforms to the current engine
and emission system protection standards
and fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricant Standardization
and Approval Committee (ILSAC),
comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
recommends checking the oil level at every
second fuel filling. The oil consumption of
the engine depends on engine speed and
engine load. Under extreme driving
–10
10
30
–30
20
40 50
–20
0
conditions, oil consumption can be higher.
–20
80
100
120
0
20 40
60
qRecommended Oil
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
5W-20
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine
friction.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page343
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (343,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Except U.S.A. and CANADA
4. Remove the service cover.
(ILSAC)
The quality designation SL,SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
5. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
–30
–10
10
30
20
40 50
–20
0
–20
80
100
120
0
20 40
60
Full
OK
5W-20
Low
6. Pull it out again and examine the level.
The level is normal if it is between
Low and Full.
qInspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
If it is near or below Low, add enough
oil to bring the level to Full.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
CAUTION
Do not add engine oil over Full. This
may cause engine damage.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
The distance between Low and Full on the
dipstick represents the following:
Oil capacity
L (US qt, Imp qt)
2.0 (2.1, 1.8)
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page344
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (344,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Engine Coolant
l
Each mark from the Full mark equates to
about 0.5 L (0.5 US qt, 0.4 Imp qt).
There are 3 marks between Low and Full.
qInspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Full
Do not use a match or live flame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become
very hot. You could be burned.
Carefully inspect the engine coolant
in the coolant reservoir, but do not
open it.
Low
0.5 L (0.5 US qt, 0.4 Imp qt)
1.0 L (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
1.5 L (1.6 US qt, 1.3 Imp qt)
2.0 L (2.1 US qt, 1.8 Imp qt)
l
Verify that the engine cover is securely
installed.
Turn off the ignition switch and
make sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan
could continue running indefinitely
even if the engine has stopped and
the engine compartment temperature
is high. You could be hit by the fan
and seriously injured.
Do not remove the cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are
hot, scalding coolant and steam may
shoot out under pressure and cause
serious injury.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page345
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (345,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
CAUTION
Ø Radiator coolant will damage
paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
Ø Use only soft (demineralized)
water in the coolant mixture.
Water that contains minerals will
cut down on the coolant's
effectiveness.
Once the engine coolant exceeds a preset
temperature, an electrical cooling fan turns
on. It will continue running for about 10
minutes after the Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position.
NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Ø Don't add only water. Always add
a proper coolant mixture.
Ø The engine has aluminum parts
and must be protected by an
ethylene-glycol-based coolant to
prevent corrosion and freezing.
Ø DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or
Silicate.
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year―at the beginning of the
winter season―and before traveling
where temperatures may drop below
freezing.
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol
with the coolant. This could
damage the cooling system.
Ø Don't use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze.
This would reduce effectiveness.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the F and L marks
on the coolant reservoir when the engine
is cool.
If it's at or near L, add enough coolant to
the coolant reservoir to provide freezing
and corrosion protection and to bring the
level to F.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page346
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (346,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Brake/Clutch Fluid
If the “FL22” mark is shown on or near the
cooling system cap, use FL22 type engine
coolant. If engine coolant other than FL22
type is used, the engine coolant must be
replaced earlier than the specified replacement
interval indicated in the scheduled
maintenance (page 8-3).
q
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level
The brakes and clutch draw fluid from the
same reservoir.
Inspect the fluid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept at MAX.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake and clutch
linings. If it is excessively low, have the
brake/clutch system inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page347
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (347,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qAdding Brake/Clutch Fluid
Washer Fluid
qInspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
WARNING
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on
yourself or on the engine:
Spilled brake fluid is dangerous. If it
gets in your eyes, they could be
seriously injured. If this happens,
immediately flush your eyes with
water and get medical attention.
Brake fluid spilled on a hot engine
could cause a fire.
Use only windshield washer fluid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the
windshield, affect your visibility, and
could result in an accident.
If the brake/clutch fluid level is low,
have the brakes and clutch inspected:
Low brake/clutch fluid levels are
dangerous. Low levels could signal
brake lining wear or a brake system
leak. Your brakes could fail and
cause an accident.
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Operating your vehicle in
temperatures below 4 degrees C (40
degrees F) using washer fluid without
anti-freeze protection is dangerous
as it could cause impaired windshield
vision and result in an accident. In
cold weather, always use washer
fluid with anti-freeze protection.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid until it
reaches MAX.
Before adding fluid, thoroughly clean the
area around the cap.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the use
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), which
are commonly used as anti-freeze agents in
washer fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOC
content should be used only if it provides
adequate freeze resistance for all regions and
climates in which the vehicle will be operated.
CAUTION
Ø Brake and clutch fluid will
damage painted surfaces. If brake
or clutch fluid does get on a
painted surface, wash it off with
water immediately.
Ø Using nonspecified brake and
damage the systems. Mixing
different fluids will also damage
them.
If the brake/clutch system
frequently requires new fluid,
consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page348
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (348,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir; add fluid if necessary.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Full
OK
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
Low
Use plain water if washer fluid is
unavailable.
But use only washer fluid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page349
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (349,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
q
Replacing Windshield Wiper Blades
Wiper Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
CAUTION
Ø Hot waxes applied by automatic
car washers have been known to
affect the wiper's ability to clean
windows.
Ø To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, don't use gasoline,
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, don't try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
Ø When the wiper lever is in the
AUTO position and the ignition
switch is in the ON position, the
wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
NOTE
To prevent damage to the wiper arm blades
when raising both the driver and passenger
side wiper arms, raise the driver side wiper
arm first. Conversely, when setting down the
wiper arms, set the passenger side wiper arm
down first.
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
If the windshield is struck with
a hand or other object.
If the rain sensor is struck with
a hand or other object from
inside the vehicle.
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the blade
assembly to expose the plastic locking
clip.
Compress the clip and slide the
assembly downward; then lift it off the
arm.
Be careful not to pinch hands or
fingers as it may cause injury, or
damage the wipers. When
washing or servicing your Mazda,
make sure the wiper lever is in the
OFF position.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
Plastic locking clip
CAUTION
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, don't
let it slap down on the windshield.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page350
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (350,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
2. Hold the end of the rubber and pull
until the tabs are free of the metal
support.
CAUTION
Ø Don't bend or discard the
stiffeners. You need to use them
again.
Ø If the metal stiffeners are
switched, the blade's wiping
efficiency could be reduced.
So don't use the driver's side metal
stiffeners on the passenger's side,
or vice versa.
Ø Be sure to reinstall the metal
stiffeners in the new blade rubber
so that the curve is the same as it
was in the old blade rubber.
Metal support
Tab
3. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
4. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
NOTE
Install the blade so that the tabs are toward the
bottom of the wiper arm.
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page351
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (351,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting
to ensure safe and correct handling:
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery
fluid:
Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.
Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in
eyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes with
water for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could cause
serious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when
working near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle
body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page352
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (352,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page353
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (353,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Tires
l
Remove the engine and battery covers
before performing battery maintenance.
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire inflation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
Engine cover
Battery cover
WARNING
Using Different Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with different
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor
braking; leading to loss of control.
Use all radial, all bias-belted, or all
bias-type tires.
l
If the cover has been removed, install it in
the reverse order of removal.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Using any other tire size than what is
specified for your Mazda (page 10-6)
is dangerous. It could seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clearance, tire
clearance, and speedometer
qBattery Maintenance
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specified for your
Mazda.
qTire Inflation Pressure
WARNING
Always inflate the tires to the correct
pressure:
To get the best service from a battery:
l
Keep it securely mounted.
Keep the top clean and dry.
Keep terminals and connections clean,
Overinflation or underinflation of
tires is dangerous. Adverse handling
or unexpected tire failure could result
in a serious accident.
Refer to specification charts on page
l
l
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly
or terminal grease.
Rinse off spilled electrolyte
l
immediately with a solution of water
and baking soda.
If the vehicle will not be used for an
l
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables.
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page354
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (354,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Systemí
does not alleviate the need to check the
tire condition every day, including
whether the tires all look inflated properly.
Inspect all tire pressure monthly when the
tires are cold. Maintain recommended
pressures for the best ride, handling, and
minimum tire wear.
qTire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires if
irregular wear develops. According to the
scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to
Scheduled Maintenance on page 8-3.
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
When checking the tire pressures, use of a
digital tire pressure gauge is
recommended.
NOTE
Because your vehicle is not equipped with a
spare tire, you cannot do a tire rotation safely
with the jack that comes with your vehicle.
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer perform
tire rotation.
Forward
Refer to the specification charts (page
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
NOTE
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
l
Always check tire pressure when tires are
cold.
l
Warm tires normally exceed recommended
pressures. Don't release air from warm tires
to adjust the pressure.
Underinflation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,
and poor sealing of the tire bead, which
will deform the wheel and cause separation
of tire from rim.
l
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
l
l
l
l
After rotation, inflate all tire pressures to
lug nuts for tightness.
l
Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs inflating,
have it inspected.
8-24
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page355
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (355,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
CAUTION
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
l
When tires with steel wire reinforcement in
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to
rear, not from side to side. Tire
performance will be reduced if
rotated from side to side.
the sidewalls are used, the system may not
function correctly even with a genuine
wheel.
Refer to System Error Activation on page
l
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors
whenever tires or wheels are replaced.
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-33.
CAUTION
Limited-Slip Differential system;
don't use the following:
Ø Tires not of the designated size
Ø Tires of different sizes or types at
the same time
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator
will appear as a solid band across the
tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated
If these instructions aren't followed,
the rotation of the left and right
wheels will be different and will thus
apply a constant load on the limited-
slip differential.
Tread wear indicator
This will cause a malfunction.
qReplacing a Tire
New tread
Worn tread
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
You should replace it before the band is
across the entire tread.
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. You should
replace the spare tire when you replace the
other road tires due to the aging of the spare
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and
year is indicated with 4 digit.
CAUTION
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
When replacing/repairing the tires or
wheels or both, have the work done
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer, or
the tire pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-21.
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page356
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (356,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
qTemporary Spare Tire
Tires degrade over time, even when they are
not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are
6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. You should
replace the spare tire when you replace the
other road tires due to the aging of the spare
tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and
year is indicated with 4 digit.
Your Mazda is not equipped with a spare
tire. If you require a spare tire, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
monthly to make sure it's properly inflated
and stored.
NOTE
The temporary spare tire condition gradually
Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-21.
deteriorates even if it has not been used.
The temporary spare tire is easier to
qReplacing a Wheel
handle because of its construction which
is lighter and smaller than a conventional
tire. This tire should be used only for an
emergency and only for a short distance.
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size
on your vehicle:
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be affected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
Use the temporary spare tire only until the
conventional tire is repaired, which should
be as soon as possible.
Maintain its pressure at 420 kPa (4.2
kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).
CAUTION
Ø Do not use your temporary spare
tire rim with a snow tire or a
conventional tire. Neither will
properly fit and could damage
both tire and rim.
Ø The temporary spare tire has a
tread life of less than 5,000 km
(3,000 miles). The tread life may
be shorter depending on driving
conditions.
Ø The temporary spare tire is for
limited use, however, if the tread
wear solid-band indicator
appears, replace the tire with the
same type of temporary spare
8-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page357
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (357,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
Ø A wrong-sized wheel may
adversely affect:
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Tire fit
Wheel and bearing life
Ground clearance
Snow-chain clearance
Speedometer calibration
Headlight aim
Bumper height
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System
Ø
Limited-Slip Differential System
Ø (With Tire Pressure Monitoring
System)
Ø
When replacing/repairing the
tires or wheels or both, have the
work done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer, or the tire
pressure sensors may be
damaged.
Ø
The wheels equipped on your
Mazda are specially designed
for installation of the tire
pressure sensors. Do not use
non-genuine wheels, otherwise
it may not be possible to install
the tire pressure sensors.
NOTE
Be sure to install the tire pressure sensors
whenever tires or wheels are replaced. Refer to
Tires and Wheels on page 5-33.
When replacing a wheel, make sure the
new one is the same as the original factory
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset.
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and flat spots.
8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page358
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (358,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Light Bulbs
Overhead light (Rear)
Brake lights/Taillights
Trunk light
High-mount brake light
License plate light
Reverse lights
Rear side-marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)
Vanity mirror lights
Courtesy lights
Side turn signal lights
Headlights (High beam)
Fog lights
Parking lights/Front turn signal lights
Headlights (Low beam)
Some models.
8-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page359
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (359,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
High-beam bulb
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned
off and the headlight switch is off.
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement
is necessary.
2. If you are changing the right headlight
bulb, start the engine, turn the steering
wheel all the way to the right, and turn
off engine. If you are changing the left
headlight bulb, turn the steering wheel
to the left.
3. Turn the center section of the plastic
retainer counterclockwise and remove
the retainers and partially peel back the
mudguard.
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands and
always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it
will explode and serious injuries
could be caused by the flying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when
lit.
Removal
Installation
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on
the connector with your finger and
pulling the connector downward.
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb
or breaking it some other way.
qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Replacing a headlight bulb
Low-beam bulb
(Xenon fusion bulb)
You cannot replace the low beam bulbs by
yourself.
The bulbs must be replaced at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page360
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (360,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly to
remove it. Carefully remove the bulb
from its socket in the reflector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
Replacing a Fog Light Bulb
1. Remove the fog light cover by pulling
it outward using both hands.
2. Loosen the screws securing the fog
light unit.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
NOTE
l
To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
l
If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,
it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol
before being used.
l
Use the protective cover and carton of the
replacement bulb to dispose of the old bulb
promptly out of the reach of children.
8-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page361
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (361,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Remove the fog light unit by pulling it
downward and then straight out using
both hands.
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights
1. Make sure the ignition switch is turned
off and the headlight switch is off.
2. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the right, and turn off
engine. If you are changing the left
bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left.
3. Turn the center section of the plastic
retainer counterclockwise and remove
the retainers and partially peel back the
mudguard.
Removal
NOTE
When pulling out the fog light unit, be careful
not to allow the bulb socket to contact the oil
cooler.
Installation
4. Press the tab on the bulb socket and
disconnect the connector cord.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise as shown in the
figure and remove it.
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb.
7. Reinstall the bulb socket in the reverse
order of the removal procedure.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page362
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (362,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Side-turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights
Due to the complexity and difficulty of
the procedure, the LED bulbs should be
replaced by an expert repairer, we
1. Slide the light unit rearward.
2. Rotate the light unit clockwise as
shown in the figure and pull it out.
recommend an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Rear turn signal lights, Reverse lights,
Rear side marker lights
1. Pull the center section of the plastic
retainer and remove the retainers and
partially open the trunk side trim.
Removal
3. Press the tab on the bulb socket and
disconnect the connector cord.
Installation
2. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
4. Replace with a new light unit and
install it in the reverse order of the
removal procedure.
NOTE
The side-turn signal light bulb cannot be
replaced. The entire light unit itself has to be
replaced, therefore consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for a replacement light unit.
8-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page363
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (363,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Reverse lights
High-mount brake light
1. Wrap the end of a flathead screwdriver
in a soft cloth and remove the trunk
handle by inserting the flathead
screwdriver in the position shown in
the figure and carefully prying the
handle off.
Rear side marker lights
2. Disengage the pin in each clip securing
the trunk trim using a ( ) screwdriver,
remove the screws and clips, and then
remove the trunk trim.
Removal
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Installation
8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page364
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (364,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Press the tab on the bulb socket and
remove the connector cord.
2. Wrap the end of a flathead screwdriver
in a soft cloth to prevent damage to the
lens and remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with the
flathead screwdriver.
3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
4. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise as shown in the
figure and pull it out, then pull out the
bulb from the socket.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket in the reverse
order of the removal procedure.
NOTE
When re-installing the trunk trim, set the trunk
trim in place and insert the clips without the
internal pin, then insert the pins and engage
them.
License plate light
1. Press the front of the lens to detach the
front tabs.
8-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page365
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (365,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Overhead light (Rear), Courtesy lights,
Vanity mirror lights
qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)
1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver with
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the
lens and remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with the
screwdriver.
1. Remove the screws with a Phillips
screwdriver.
2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the trim and
gently insert it in the overhead light as
shown in the figure, and then remove
the overhead light unit.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page366
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (366,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuses
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
If any lights, accessories, or controls don't
work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
qFuse Replacement
Trunk light
Replacing the fuses on the driver's side
1. Press both sides of the lens cap to
remove it.
If the electrical system does not work,
first inspect the fuses on the driver's side.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
1. Turn off the ignition switch and other
switches.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of removal.
8-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page367
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (367,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fuse
puller provided on the inside of the
engine compartment fuse block cover.
Replacing the fuses under the hood
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the fuses in
the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Turn off the ignition switch and all
other switches.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
Next to air filter
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it's
blown.
Near battery
Blown
Normal
Engine cover
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it fits tightly. If it
does not fit tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an
Battery cover
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the AUDIO or CIGAR circuit.
NOTE
Remove the engine and battery covers before
removing the fuse block cover near the battery.
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with one of the
same rating. Otherwise you may
damage the electric system.
8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page368
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (368,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating.
Normal
Blown
WARNING
Do not replace the main fuse by
yourself. Have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer perform the replacement:
Replacing the fuse by yourself is
dangerous because the MAIN fuse is
a high current fuse. Incorrect
replacement could cause an electrical
shock or a short circuit resulting in a
fire.
NOTE
Verify that the engine cover is securely
installed.
8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page369
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (369,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
qFuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
(Next to air filter)
28
20
21
29
30
31
1
22
23
24
25
26
27
32
33
34
35
36
37
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Next to battery)
38
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
RATING
120A
40A
60A
30A
50A
30A
40A
30A
30A
15A
15A
15A
15A
30A
20A
20A
―
1
2
MAIN
HEATER
AIR PUMP
BTN
For protection of all circuits
Heater
3
Air pump
4
Power door locks, Illuminated entry system, Moonroofí
5
DEFOG
FAN 1
Rear window defroster
6
Electric fan 1
ABS, DSCí
7
ABS/DSC
ACC
8
Lighter, Power control mirror, Accessory socket, Audio system
9
FAN 2
Electric fan 2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
HEAD
Headlight high beamsí, Headlight cleanerí
Headlight low beam (RH)
Headlight low beam (LH)
DRLí (Headlight high beams)
DSCí
HEAD LOW R
HEAD LOW L
DRL
DSC
SEAT WARM
H/CLEAN
R.FOG
Seat warmerí
Headlight cleanerí
―
íSome models.
8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page370
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (370,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
FUSE
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
RATING
15A
10A
40A
30A
15A
10A
20A
15A
15A
15A
10A
20A
15A
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
FOG
A/C
Fog lightsí
Air conditioner
IG
For protection of various circuits
Power window
P.WIND 1
IG KEY
STOP
For protection of various circuits
Brake lights
FUEL PUMP
HORN
HAZARD
ETV
Fuel pump
Horn
Hazard warning flashers, Turn signals
Electric throttle valve
Starter
ST
WIPER
TCM
Windshield wiper and washer
TCMí
Engine control system, Supplemental restraint system, ABS,
Power steering
31
32
ENGINE
TAIL
15A
10A
Taillights, License plate light, Parking lights, Front side-maker
lights, Rear side-marker lights
33
34
35
36
37
38
ILLUMI
EGI COMP1
EGI COMP2
EGI INJ
7.5A
15A
10A
15A
20A
60A
Illuminated entry system
Engine control system
Engine control system
Fuel injector
P.WIND 2
EPS
Power window
Power steering
8-40
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page371
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (371,1)
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse panel (Driver's side)
FUSE
RATING
DESCRIPTION
PROTECTED COMPONENT
1
2
CIGAR
ACC
15A
7.5A
―
Lighter
Audio system, Power control mirror
3
OUTLET
A/C
―
4
7.5A
10A
―
Air conditioner
5
METER
―
Instrument cluster
6
―
7
SPARE
SPARE
M.DEF
DSC
―
―
8
―
―
9
10A
7.5A
25A
30A
15A
15A
―
Mirror defrosterí
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
DSCí
AUDIO
D.LOCK
OUTLET
ROOM
SPARE
SPARE
Audio system (Bose® Sound System-equipped model)í
Power door locks, Moonroofí
Accessory socket
Interior lights
―
―
―
íSome models.
8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page372
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (372,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
qDamage Caused by Bird
How to Minimize
Environmental Paint Damage
Dropping, Insects, or Tree Sap
Occurrence
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
aren't removed they can eat away the clear
and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
When insects stick to the paint surface
and decompose, corrosive compounds
form. These can erode the clear and color
base coat of the vehicle's paintwork if
they are not removed.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent
them.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
qEtching Caused by Acid Rain or
permanently to the paint finish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Industrial Fallout
Occurrence
Prevention
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the finish.
It is necessary to have your Mazda
washed and waxed to preserve its finish
according to the instructions in this
section. This should be done as soon as
possible.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Bird droppings can be removed with a
soft sponge and water. If you are traveling
and these are not available, a moistened
tissue may also take care of the problem.
The cleaned area should be waxed
according to the instructions in this
section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you suspect that acid rain has settled on
your vehicle's finish.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
8-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page373
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (373,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
NOTE
l
qWater Marks
The paint chipping zone varies with the
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
In low temperatures a vehicle's finish
hardens. This increases the chance of paint
chipping.
Chipped paint can lead to rust forming on
your Mazda. Before this happens, repair the
damage by using Mazda touch-up paint
according to the instructions in this section.
Failure to repair the affected area could
lead to serious rusting and expensive
repairs.
Occurrence
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these
minerals settles on the vehicle and
evaporates, the minerals will concentrate
and harden to form white rings. The rings
can damage your vehicle's finish.
l
l
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its finish according to
the instructions in this section. These
steps should be taken immediately after
you find water marks on your vehicle's
finish.
qPaint Chipping
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances of
having your paint chipped by flying
gravel.
8-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page374
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (374,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Scratches occur on the paint surface
when:
Exterior Care
l
The vehicle is washed without first
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
rinsing off dirt and other foreign
matter.
The vehicle is washed with a rough,
l
dry, or dirty cloth.
The vehicle is washed at a car wash
that uses brushes that are dirty or too
stiff.
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
qMaintaining the Finish
l
Washing
l
CAUTION
are used.
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position and the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the wipers may
move automatically in the following
cases:
NOTE
l
Mazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
Ø If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
l
Scratches are more noticeable on vehicles
with darker paint finishes.
Ø If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
Ø If the windshield is struck with a
hand or other object.
Ø If the rain sensor is struck with a
hand or other object from inside
the vehicle.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint finish:
l
Rinse off any dirt or other foreign
matter using lukewarm or cold water
before washing.
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
l
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
Rub gently when washing or drying the
Be careful not to pinch hands or
fingers as it may cause injury, or
damage the wipers. When washing
or servicing your Mazda, make sure
the wiper lever is in the OFF position.
l
vehicle.
l
Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
Don't use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
To help protect the finish from rust and
deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
l
CAUTION
Don't use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may damage
the protective coating; also, cleaners
and detergents may discolor or
deteriorate the paint.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
8-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page375
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (375,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Pay special attention to removing salt,
dirt, mud, and other foreign material from
the underside of the fenders, and make
sure the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors and rocker panels are clean.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits can
damage the finish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similar
materials will usually also take off the wax.
Rewax these areas even if the rest of the
vehicle doesn't need it.
qRepairing Damage to the Finish
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Don't allow soap
to dry on the finish.
Deep scratches or chips on the finish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies
anti-corrosion materials to all parts,
both repaired and new. This will
prevent them from rusting.
WARNING
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance is normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
qBright-Metal Maintenance
l
Use tar remover to remove road tar and
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
To prevent corrosion on bright-metal
surfaces, apply wax or chrome
l
Waxing
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the finish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
During cold weather or in coastal areas,
l
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
8-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page376
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (376,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
WARNING
CAUTION
Dry wet brakes by driving very slowly
and applying the brakes lightly until
brake performance is normal:
Driving with wet brakes is
Don't use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating and
cause discoloration or paint
dangerous. Increased stopping
distance or the vehicle pulling to one
side when braking could result in a
serious accident. Light braking will
indicate whether the brakes have
been affected.
deterioration.
qUnderbody Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
qAluminum Wheel Maintenance
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
NOTE
l
Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive
cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent on
aluminum wheels. They may damage the
coating.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and
wheel housings with lukewarm or cold
water at the end of each winter. Try also
to do this every month.
l
Only use a mild soap or neutral detergent
and always use a sponge or soft cloth to
clean the wheels.
Rinse thoroughly with lukewarm or cold
water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels
after driving on dusty or salted roads. This
helps prevent corrosion.
Avoid washing your vehicle in an automatic
car wash that uses high-speed or hard
brushes.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt. It
will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
l
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped
there will cause rusting.
l
If your aluminum wheels lose luster, wax
the wheels.
(With Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Check special requirements for Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Refer to Tires and Wheels on page 5-33.
8-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page377
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (377,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Fabricí
Interior Care
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean it with a mild soap solution good
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh
spots immediately with a fabric spot
cleaner.
qDashboard Precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
and cosmetic oils from contacting the
dashboard. They'll damage and discolor it.
If these solutions get on the dashboard,
wipe them off immediately.
To keep the fabric looking clean and
fresh, take care of it. Otherwise its color
will be affected, it can be stained easily,
and its fire-resistance may be reduced.
CAUTION
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients
which may cause discoloration,
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.
CAUTION
Use only recommended cleaners and
procedures. Others may affect
appearance and fire-resistance.
qCleaning the Upholstery and
Interior Trim
Piano black panel
Vinyl
The following parts are fitted with panels
that have been treated with a special
coating that resists scratching.
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
cleaner.
l
Center panel
Door switch panel
Steering wheel (partial)
l
l
Leatherí
When the panel needs to be cleaned, use a
soft cloth to wipe off dirt from the surface.
Real leather is not uniform and may have
scars, scratches, and wrinkles. Clean it
with a leather cleaner or mild soap.
If the leather gets wet from rain, remove
the moisture as soon as possible and dry
in a shaded area.
NOTE
Scratches or nicks on the panels resulting from
the use of a hard brush or cloth may not be
repairable.
If the seats get wet, promptly remove
moisture with a dry cloth and allow it to
further dry in a shaded area.
If moisture is not removed, it will cause
hardening and shrinkage of the leather.
Do not leave vinyl products on the seats
for long periods as they may affect the
leather quality and coloring.
íSome models.
8-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page378
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (378,1)
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Don't bleach
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry
the belt webbing and make sure there is
no remaining moisture before retracting
them.
WARNING
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
replace damaged seat belts
immediately:
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection.
qCleaning the Window Interiors
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy film, clean them
with glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the container.
CAUTION
Ø Don't scrape or scratch the inside
of the rear window. You may
damage the rear window defroster
grid.
Ø When washing the inside rear
window, use a soft cloth
dampened in lukewarm water,
gently wiping the antenna lines.
Use of glass cleaning products
could damage the antenna.
8-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page379
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (379,1)
Customer Information and Reporting
Safety Defects
9
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page380
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (380,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle
in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management, you can reach Mazda North American Operations by one of the following
ways.
Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the
page at www.mazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page381
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (381,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
qSTEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may not
be possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered, Mazda
North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the
extent permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to
BBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon
Law”. If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to first use BBB AUTO
LINE.
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding
on you or Mazda else you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page382
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (382,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
qCalifornia Customers
1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/
arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200
Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.
BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration Certification
Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may file a claim with BBB
AUTO LINE. Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after
the expiration of the warranty.
3. To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the
call.
4. In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and
address, the brand name and vehicle identification number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage, the
approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were first brought to the
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal
hearing. The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the
time your complaint is filed; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contact
Mazda about your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an
inspection/report by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by
BBB AUTO LINE.
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I of
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page383
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (383,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative is
unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs first, one or more of the following
occurs:
l
The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that
substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that
is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the
nonconformity has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents
AND the buyer or lessee has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
l
The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda or its
agents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
l
The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the
vehicle to the buyer.
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618
ATTN: Customer Mediation
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).
10. You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and
any findings will be admissible in a court action.
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we
receive notice of your acceptance of the decision.
12. Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page384
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (384,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Canada)
qSatisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. In
our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your
dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal
dealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General
Manager.
qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc.Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office address
and phone numbers are shown (page 9-8).
qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800)
263-4680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” page
of section 10 of this manual for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page385
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (385,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
qMediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer
Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still
not resolved, you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about
how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through
binding arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that
goal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the
award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of it's dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish
to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page386
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (386,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:
Province/Territory
British Columbia & Yukon Territories
Alberta & Northwest Territories
Saskatchewan
CAMVAP Number
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba
Ontario
Atlantic Canada
Quebec
qRegional Offices
REGIONAL OFFICES
AREAS COVERED
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
8171 ACKROYD ROAD
SUITE 2000
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
RICHMOND B.C.
V6X 3K1
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
(604) 303-5670
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
ONTARIO
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
(905) 787-7000
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANS
CANADIENNE
QUEBEC,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
(514) 694-6390
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page387
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (387,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized
Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top
condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
qSTEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
qSTEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page388
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (388,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Importer/Distributor
Distributor in Each Area
qU.S.A.
qCANADA
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)
q
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto
Rico)
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00936-2722
TEL: (787) 641-9300
qGUAM
Triple J Motors
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,
GUAM 96911 USA
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931
TEL: (671) 649-6555
qSAIPAN
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234-7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051
qAMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American
Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699-9347
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page389
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (389,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Warranties for Your Mazda
l
l
l
l
l
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Distributor Major Component Limited Warranty (Canada only)
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
Federal Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)
l
Emission Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
l
l
l
l
l
California Emission Control Warranty (U.S.A. only)
Emission Control Warranty (Canada only)
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Tire Warranty
NOTE
Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda.
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page390
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (390,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United
States may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside the United States. However, in the event that you are moving to Canada
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety requirements (CMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on
vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United
States:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page391
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (391,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside Canada
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission
regulations and safety regulations. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada may differ
from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States
permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers on
vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada:
l
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
l
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page392
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (392,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except
United States and Canada)
Government regulations in your country could require that automobiles meet specific
emission and safety standards.
Vehicles built for your country may differ from those built for other countries. In addition
to registration problems, satisfactory service may be difficult or even impossible in another
country.
The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page393
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (393,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your
vehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed
parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safety
systems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of
injuries in an accident.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as
mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an
improper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine
stalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page394
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (394,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Cell Phones
Cell Phones Warning
WARNING
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your State or Province:
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of
these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious
accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe
area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-
free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell
phone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead,
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page395
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (395,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Type Approval of Equipment
Type Approval of Equipment
Keyless entry system
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page396
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (396,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Type Approval of Equipment
Immobilizer system
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page397
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (397,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and
temperature performance.
qTread Wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
qTraction-AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction
tests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
qTemperature-A, B, C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page398
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (398,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
WARNING
Keep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:
Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary
with respect to grade.
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND
TO ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
qUniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
UTQGS MARK (example)
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page399
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (399,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Labeling
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case of
a recall.
qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires
Please refer to the diagram below.
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number
2. Passenger car tire
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
5. Radial
6. Rim diameter code
7. Load index & speed symbol
8. Severe snow conditions
9. Tire ply composition and materials used
10. Max. load rating
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page400
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (400,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
11. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades
12. Max. permissible inflation pressure
13. SAFETY WARNING
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
NOTE
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
215
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
65
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.
15
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
95
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each
tire can support.
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page401
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (401,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
99 mph
Q
R
S
106 mph
112 mph
118 mph
124 mph
130 mph
149 mph
168* mph
186* mph
T
U
H
V
W
Y
* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow
AT: All Terrain.
AS: All Season. The “M+S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in
mud and snow.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. In
general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and other.
Maximum Load Rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by
the tire.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under
normal driving conditions.
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page402
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (402,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Snow Tires
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.
Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other
tires on your vehicle.
SAFETY WARNING
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:
l
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-
MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)
TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT
TIRES.
l
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-
FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page403
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (403,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qInformation on Temporary Tires
Please refer to the diagram below.
1. Temporary tires
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
4. Diagonal
5. Rim diameter code
6. Load index&speed symbol
T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
115
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
9-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page404
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (404,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
70
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.
16
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
90
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each
tire can support.
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating
Speed Rating
M
81 mph
9-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page405
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (405,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)
You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the rear door on the driver's side.
SAMPLE
qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure
On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psi
for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the
inflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure is
maintained.
Refer to Tires on page 10-6.
NOTE
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended cold
tire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.
9-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page406
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (406,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Always check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the
information in this owner's manual:
Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may
result in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing
and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It
results in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire
can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by looking
at them.
qChecking Tire Pressure
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold ―meaning they are not
hot from driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the
valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
6. Replace the valve cap.
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.
NOTE
Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure.
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other
irregularities.
NOTE
Warm tires normally exceed recommended pressures. Don't release air from warm tires to adjust the
pressure.
Under-inflation can cause serious failures and accidents.
Over-inflation can produce a harsh ride and the greater possibility of damage from road hazards.
9-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page407
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (407,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qGlossary of Terms
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and
the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of
manufacture.
Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and
cargo.
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's
mounted on the vehicle.
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity
is described on the tire label.
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
9-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page408
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (408,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Maintenance
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are
some important maintenance points:
qTire Inflation Pressure
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the
pressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.
qTire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregular
wear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.
Forward
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a
combination of the following:
l
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
l
l
l
for tightness.
9-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page409
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (409,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern
or studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be
weakened if rotated from side to side.
(With limited-slip differential)
Don't use the following:
Ø Tires not of the designated size
Ø Tires of different sizes or types at the same time
Ø Tires not sufficiently inflated
If these instructions aren't followed, the rotation of the left and right wheels will be
different and will thus apply a constant load on the limited-slip differential.
This will cause a malfunction.
qReplacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could
result in an accident.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. Replace
the tire when this happens.
Tread wear indicator
New tread
Worn tread
You should replace it before the band is across the entire tread.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tires
generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high
loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when you
replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. Regarding the manufacturing week and
year is indicated with 4 digit. Refer to The tire labeling on page 9-21.
9-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page410
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (410,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
qSafety Practices
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate
good driving habits for your own benefit.
l
Observe posted speed limits
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Do no run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking
l
l
l
CAUTION
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your
tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution
until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire
is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with
your spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
vehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
9-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page411
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (411,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Vehicle Loading
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle
damage.
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle,
familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings,
from the vehicle's Safety Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:
WARNING
Overloaded Vehicle:
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's
suspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure,
handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the
distance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail
completely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a
combination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflation
pressure.
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the
vehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.
9-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page412
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (412,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed to
carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load
Information label on the rear door on the driver's side or door pillar. Look for “THE
COMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER
EXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire
label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any
aftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of
the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be
accurate.
9-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page413
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (413,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
CARGO
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment.
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire
label.
9-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page414
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (414,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg
(849 lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:
_
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg
(699 lbs)
_
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2)
lbs) = 249 kg (549 lbs)
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) -
including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label located on the rear door on the driver's side or door pillar. The
total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight
cargo
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is
shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the rear door on the
driver's side or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
9-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page415
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (415,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
WARNING
Exceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and
could result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling,
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, or loss of control.
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to
tow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicle
damage.
9-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page416
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (416,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GCW
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the
vehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
WARNING
Exceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or
damage to the vehicle.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.
9-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page417
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (417,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit:
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit:
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
_
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 × 150) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
9-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page418
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (418,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor
Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
Importer/Distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153) ; go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC,
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
NOTE
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618-2922
or
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 9-10) in
this booklet.
9-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page419
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (419,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm
9-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page420
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (420,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
Service Publications
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do
some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the
chart below.
If they do not have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER
9999-95-064B-10
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
2010 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)
2010 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)
2010 OWNER'S MANUAL
9999-95-049G-10
9999-95-079C-10 (U.S.A. only)
9999-EC-079C-10 (Canada only)
9999-PR-079C-10 (Puerto Rico only)
9999-95-102F-09
2010 OWNER'S MANUAL
2010 OWNER'S MANUAL
2010 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS
9999-95-NAV1-10 (U.S.A. only)
9999-EC-NAV1-10 (Canada only)
9999-PR-NAV1-10 (Puerto Rico only)
2010 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL
2010 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL
2010 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL
qWORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and
chassis.
qWIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical
system.
qOWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.
This is not a technician's manual.
qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.
9-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page421
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (421,1)
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
qNAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation
system. This is not a technician's manual.
9-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page422
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (422,1)
9-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page424
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (424,1)
Identification Numbers
qChassis Number
Vehicle Information Labels
qVehicle Identification Number
The vehicle identification number legally
identifies your vehicle. The number is on
a plate attached to the left top side of the
dashboard. This plate can easily be seen
through the windshield.
qVehicle Emission Control
Information Label
q
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
qTire Pressure Label
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page425
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (425,1)
Identification Numbers
qEngine Number
Forward
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page426
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (426,1)
Specifications
Specifications
qEngine
Item
Type
Model
Rotary engine
Displacement
Compression ratio
654 ml × 2 (654 cc × 2, 40.0 cu in × 2)
10.0
qElectrical System
Item
Classification
Battery
12V-55AH/5HR
Trailing side
Spark-plug number
N3Y1 18 110A, N3H1 18 110D*1
Leading side
N3Y8 18 110A, N3Y9 18 110A, N3H5 18 110A*1
Spark-plug gap
*1 ex factory
1.15―1.25 mm (0.046―0.049 in)
CAUTION
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulate
coating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.
qLubricant Quality
Lubricant
Classification
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on page 8-12.
API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-90)
JWS3309
Engine oil
Manual transmission oil
Automatic transmission fluid
API Service GL-5 (SAE 90)
Rear differential oil
API Service GL-5 (SAE 80W-90)
API Service GL-5 (SAE 75W-90)*
SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
Brake/Clutch fluid
* Not available from Mazda
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page427
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (427,1)
Specifications
qCapacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Item
Capacity
With oil filter replacement
4.4 L (4.6 US qt, 3.9 Imp qt)
Engine oil
Coolant
Without oil filter
replacement
4.2 L (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt)
Manual transmission
10.0 L (10.6 US qt, 8.80 Imp qt)
9.8 L (10 US qt, 8.6 Imp qt)
Automatic transmission
Manual transmission oil
Automatic transmission fluid
Rear differential oil
Fuel tank
1.95 L (2.06 US qt, 1.72 Imp qt)
8.0 L (8.5 US qt, 7.0 Imp qt)
1.3 L (1.4 US qt, 1.1 Imp qt)
64.0 L (16.9 US gal, 14.1 Imp gal)
Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.
qDimensions
Item
Specification
Without license plate
holder
4,460 mm (175.6 in)
Overall length
With license plate holder
4,470 mm (176.0 in)
1,770 mm (69.7 in)
1,340 mm (52.8 in)
1,500 mm (59.1 in)
1,505 mm (59.3 in)
1,505 mm (59.3 in)
1,510 mm (59.4 in)
2,700 mm (106.3 in)
Overall width
Overall height
18-inch wheel vehicle
19-inch wheel vehicle
18-inch wheel vehicle
19-inch wheel vehicle
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
qWeights
Weight
Item
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission
1,752 kg (3,862 lbs)
858 kg (1,892 lbs)
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
1,732 kg (3,818 lbs)
842 kg (1,856 lbs)
901 kg (1,986 lbs)
Front
Rear
907 kg (2,000 lbs)
qAir Conditioner
Item
Classification
HFC134a (R-134a)
Refrigerant Type
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page428
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (428,1)
Specifications
qLight Bulbs
Exterior light
Category
Light bulb
Wattage
ECE R (SAE)
H9 (H9)
High beam
65
55
Headlights
Low beam
Halogen
H7 (H7)
Xenon fusion
35
D2S (D2S)
B1157MA (―)
HB4 (#9005)
― (―)
Front turn signal lights/Parking lights (Front side-marker lights)
Fog lightsí
27/8
51
Side turn signal lights*1
High-mount brake light
Rear turn signal lights
5
21
W21W (#7440)
WY21W (―)
― (―)
21
LED*2
Brake lights/Taillights
Reverse lights
16
W16W (#921)
W5W (4CP)
W5W (4CP)
License plate lights
5
Rear side-marker lights
5
*1 Bulb replacement is not possible because it is built into the unit. Replace the unit.
*2 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
Interior light
Category
Light bulb
Wattage
ECE R
W5W
W5W
―
Trunk light
5
5
Overhead light/Map lights (Front)
Overhead light (Rear)
Courtesy lights
10
5
W5W
―
Vanity mirror lights
2
qTires
NOTE
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted to
your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.
Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 8-23.
Inflation pressure
Tire size
Front
Rear
225/45R18 91W
225/40R19 89W
220 kPa (32 psi)
220 kPa (32 psi)
Vehicle capacity weight: 308 kg (680 lbs)
10-6
íSome models.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page429
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (429,1)
Specifications
qFuses
Refer to the fuse rating on page 8-36.
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page430
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (430,1)
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page432
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (432,1)
Index
A
B
Battery
Beep Sounds
Brake/Clutch
Automatic Transmission
Brakes
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page433
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (433,1)
Index
C
D
Child Restraint
E
Engine
D
Defroster
Engine Coolant
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page434
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (434,1)
Index
F
H
Flasher
Headlights
Fluids
I
Ignition
Fuel
G
H
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page435
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (435,1)
Index
I
M
Mirrors
J
O
K
L
P
Light Bulbs
M
Maintenance
R
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page436
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (436,1)
Index
S
S
Seat Belt System
Seats
T
Tiedown
Security System
Tires
SRS Air Bags
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page437
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (437,1)
Index
T
W
Towing
V
Windows
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
RX-8_8AT5-EA-09E_Edition1 Page438
Wednesday, April 15 2009 10:34 AM
Black plate (438,1)
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form No.8AT5-EA-09E
|